Digital PDFs

AA-M229B-TM

May 1985

192 pages

Original

9.6MB

view download

OCR Version

8.1MB

view download

Document:	TOPS20 KL inst
Order Number:	AA-M229B-TM
Revision:	0
Pages:	192
Original Filename:	AA-M229B-TM_TOPS20_KL_inst.pdf

OCR Text

TOPS-20
KL Model B Installation Guide
AA-M229B-TM

September 1985
This manual describes the procedures for installing TOPS—20
Version 6.1 on a new system and updating TOPS—20 software

on an existing KL10 Model B system.
Change bars in the margins indicate material that has been
added or changed since the previous printing of this manual.
Bullets indicate that material has been deleted.
This manual supersedes the manual of the same name and

order numbers, AA-M229A-TM and AA-M229A-T1. Please
read it in its entirety.
OPERATING SYSTEM:
SOFTWARE:

TOPS-20 V6.1

RSX-20F V15-21
KLINIT V15-15
Microcode V407

Software and manuals should be ordered by title and order number. in the United States. send orders
to the nearest distribution center. Qutside the United States. orders should be directed to the nearest

DIGITAL Field Sales Office or representative.
Northeast/Mid—Atlantic Region

Central Region

Western Region

Digital Equipment Corporation

PO Box CS2008

Accessories and Supplies Center Accessories and Supplies Center
1050 East Remington Road
632 Caribbean Drive

Nashua, New Hampshire 03061
Telephone:(603)884—6660

Schaumburg, Illinois 60195

Sunnyvale, California 94086

Telephone:(312)640-5612

Telephone:(408)734-4915

digital equipment corporatione marlboro. massachusetts

First Printing, April 1982
Updated, December 1982
Revised, September 1985

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should
not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital
Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may
appear in this document.

The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may
only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment
that is not supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies.

The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

olijgliltall

DEC
DECmate
DECsystem—10

DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS

DECwriter
DIBOL

MASSBUS
PDP
P/OS

RSX
RT

Rainbow
RSTS

Professional
Q-BUS

UNIBUS

VAX
VMS

Work Processor

The postage-prepaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this
document requests the user's critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future
documentation.

CONTENTS

DECSYSTEM-20

STARTING
THE

THE

DUMPER

FROM

TAPE

DB WWN

s
e

&
s
s
o
o
s
o
o
o
e

»
o
o

s
s

s
e
s
&
8
s
o
o
©

s
s
&6

o
s
o

o
o
o

o
o
e

e
o
s
s
e
o
o
o
o

MONITOR

SYSTEM

.
.
.
.
SOFTWARE

.
.
.
FROM TAPE

.«

Defining Line Printer Parameters
Specifying the VFU File
. . .

Specifying the RAM File
.
Defining the Local Time Zone
Directory Parameter Setting
Account Validation . . . .
.
Improvements

iid

.
.
.

.
Numbe

W w

11 WWwWwwwww
U
L

V|ROOOJINWUV N

N NN

W w

Setting Terminal Speeds
. . . . .
Defining Dial-Up (Remote) Lines
.
Defining System Logical Names
. .
Selecting an Editor
.
. .
.
Defining Magnetic Tape Logical Un i t

.
CONFIGURATION

(

.
,
.
IN THE

— P

MONITOR

SYSTEM

TOPS=20

Performance

o
s
s
0
o
¢
o
e

4
s
0o
0
e
s
e
o
®

o
o

FILE

THE SYSTEM NAME
SYSTEM DEFAULTS
FILE

PACKAGE
.
. .
INSTALLATION

TOPS-2@

BUNDLED

DUMP.EXE

THE

FOR

DIRECTORIES

TOPS-20¢

THE

TOPS-20

MONITOR

SYSTEM

THE

SYSTEM

w w

AND

e
o

SOFTWARE

THE

¢
o

o
o
o

¢
¢
o
o
IKle

=
N

TOPS5-2@

RESTORING

[

THE

CREATING

CHECKING

RUNNING

FILE

CREATING

TOPS-2f

RESTARTING

THE

CREATING

INITIALIZING

OIS
WWN K-

SPOOLING

AND

UDe

BATCH

TNe

o
o
o
¢

o
o
&
o
o
o
6
o
o

THE

CREATING

TOPS-20

SELECTING

e
o
MONITORS

Tapes
THE

CHANGING

o
e

e b fe

o
o

s
o

e
e
b

¢
o

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

)
L

Disks

TAILORING

wWww

o
o
o
o
e

TOOLS

Floppy

PREPARING

DNNNDNDDNDNDN

OO
WN -

B WRN NN

INSTALLATION

COMMAND
WWwWwWwWwwwwwwwww

CHAPTER

INFORMATION

Disk Drives
. . . .
Terminal Lines . . .
Magnetic Tape Drives
Line Printers
. . .

wWwN
-

CHAPTER

COLLECTING

et b

INTRODUCTION

WWWWWwWwwwwwww

CHAPTER

PREFACE

o
o
s

DISK

MICROCODE

RUNNING

THE

STANDARD

RUNNING

OPTIONAL

DELETING

TEMPORARY

UPDATING

THE

DIRECTORIES

DECSYSTEM-20
TOOLS

VERSION

REVERTING
MONITOR

MAKING
MONITOR

THE
L]

THE
Ll

VERSION

VERSION
.

THE

*
L4
*
L)
L]
L
[3
*
®

PERMANENT

3-18
3-18

L]
®
L

o
e+
s

PRIMARY

o
s

*
°
L]
L]

o
¢

*
L]
*

L]
®

&
o

SOFTWARE

THE

L]
L]

MONITOR

[]

6.1

VERSION
*

[]

o«

MONITOR
*

RP@6

SOFTWARE

6.1

5.1

6.1

TAPE

Preparing for Installation . . . .
Creating System Directories
. .
Restoring TOPS-2¢ Bundled Software
Renaming the Version 5.1 Monitor .
Creating the Configuration Command
Setting Parameters for <OPERATOR>
Shutting Down the DECSYSTEM-20 . .
Starting the New Software
. . . .
MAKING

[]

PACKAGE

TESTS

FILES

DISTRIBUTION

UETP

TOPS-2@

TOPS-2@¢

TO RP@4

o
o
©

MONITOR

FLOPPY

THE

SYSTEM

FRONT-END

FROM

THE

FILE

THE

STRUCTURE

FRONT-END

RUNNING

INSTALLING

OJOh

THE

FILE

CREATING

FRONT-END

INSTALLATION

~J
»

wN
-

[]

BUILDING

INSTALLING

FILE

CHAPTER

LPFORM,INI

THE

SYSTEM

CREATING

THE

CREATING THE DIRECTORY PS:<REMARKS>

STARTING

PPPDDE
PP PP

FILE

PASSWORD AND

CHAPTER

BWNDNDNDNDDNDDNDNDODNDNDE

COMMAND

OPERATOR'S

CONFIGURATION

DX20

THE

RENAMING

18]

SAVING

RESTARTING

CHANGING

FILES

APPENDIX

Migration Tape Recycle Period
Tape Drive Allocation
. . . . .
Enabling Tape Drive Allocation
Treatment of Unrecognized Tapes
Accounting Shift Changes . . . . &
Assigning MSCP-served Disk Drives
Specifying Daylight Savings Time .
Specifying Remote Line Conditions
Controlling System Message Levels
Network Information
. . . . . .

COPYING

CHAPTER

Controls

Class Scheduling . . . « .+ .
File Archiving and Migration Para me
Archive Tape Recycle Period

Bias

.
.

ONOAUNBWNDNMNHHRPSR®R
¢
o
o
¢
o
N
N =
N =
N =

WWWWWWWWWwWwWwWwwwwwwwwwww
g
*
L]
L
L]
[]
L]
[] []
[]
.
[]
[]
[ []
L
[]
[ []
[]
[]
e
OJOANMBLWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
L]
L]
L ] []
[]
[]
L]
.
.
*
L] L]
L] [ ]
.
[
*
e s b s b et e o b et
e
WO O
=Y

[ Y
G
N
N
L] [ ]
*
L]
DW=

CHAPTER

Full Latency Optimization
Working Set Swapping . . .
Scheduler Controls . « « . +

3-25

APPENDIX

POCKET

APPENDIX

INSTALLING

c.1

C.2

C.3

APPENDIX

INSTALLATION

GUIDE

FOR

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

TCP/IP-20

TCP/IP

INSTALLATION TOOLS
.
.
.
RESTORING THE TOPS-2@% BUNDLED SOFTWARE

C.4

RESTORING THE
CUSTOMIZING A

C.5

CHOOSING

C.6
C.7

CHANGING THE SYSTEM NAME .
.
COMPLETING YOUR TCP/IP INSTALLATION

TCP/IP
DATA

MONITOR

GENERATING

THE

DISTRIBUTION

FILE
o

&«

TAPE

.«

e
e

o
o

o
e

o
o

TAILORED

BATCH

GALAXY

SOURCE

AND

SPOOLING

D.1

RESTORING

D.2

RUNNING

D.3

ASSEMBLING

D.4

SHUTTING

DOWN

D.5

STARTING

D.6

MAKING

2-1

DECSYSTEM-20 Front-End Control Panels

THE

YOUR

GALGEN

THE
THE

GALAXY

OLD

NEW

SYSTEM

¢«

SYSTEM

GALAXY

NEW GALAXY

FILES

PROGRAM

NEW

THE

e
o o
o
FROM TAPE

SYSTEM

&«

PERMANENT

INDEX

FIGURES

2-2

4-1
5-1

Directories

the

Publlc

Structure

D1rectory Llstlng of Front- End
Console Terminal Output

Sample

. . . . .

F11es e o
at System

o o o o
Startup

«
.

Software

[
L]

Product

Optional

«
.

for

s
o
o

Commands

Abbreviations

o
o
o

UETP

Reload

e
e
o

7-1

System

.
Numbers

3-3
5-1

Maximum Structure Size . .
DECSYSTEM-20 Terminal Line
DECSYSTEM—-20@ Line Printers

n
To

3-1
3-2

TABLES

PREFACE

The

TOPS-20

KL Model

Installation

installing TOPS-2@0

software

provides

Model

information

system,

Protocol/Internet

updating

TOPS-2f

installing

Protocol),

and

Guide

describes

the

a new DECSYSTEM-2@.
software

TCP/IP~-20
generating

procedures

also

existing

KL1@

(Transmission
tailored

for

This guide

GALAXY

Control
software.

AUDIENCE

This
who

quide
have

addresses

the

TOPS-2#

responsibility

Install

the

Update

Install

Generate

the

TOPS-20

TCP/IP-2@

operators,

system

managers,

and

others

to:
software

software

new

DECSYSTEM-20.

existing

DECSYSTEM-24.

software.

tailored

batch

and

spooling

(GALAXY)

system.

ORGANIZATION

Chapter

describes

what

you

need

installation.
It also
install the software.
Chapter

describes

the

prepare

tools

you

for

need

describes powering up the
DECSYSTEM-20#
and
obtaining
DECSYSTEM~-2@
front-end
monitor from floppy disk.
chapter also describes loading the TOPS-2# bundled
software from magnetic tape.

the
This

Chapter

describes

how

select

system
name,
and
terminals,
system

improvements,
migration, and
Chapter

describes

the

how

proper

monitor,

the
system
accounting,

scheduler
controls,
file
other system functions.
to

DECSYSTEM-20

disks.
(When
is complete.)

the

change
devices,

you

create

and

finish

vii

the

copy

front-end

files

this

into

declare

archiving

and

system

for

file

chapter,

from

the

defaults
for
per formance

the

floppy

installation

Chapter 5

describes how to boot the system from disk.

Chapter 6

describes how to install TOPS-2@ Distribution,

Chapter 7

Package
describes how to run the User Environment Test
This program performs a cursory check
program).
(UETP

and

Appendix A

Tools

the

system.

to
pointers
with
contains step-by-step instructions,
within this guide, describing how to
chapters
various
update

Appendix B

Update,

tapes.

a TOPS-20 software system on the

is a pocket

installation

guide

for

DECSYSTEM-24.

the

experienced

installer.
It
contains
the
text
and output from a
sample
installation
of
the
TOPS-20
software
on
a
DECSYSTEM-20, Model 2066@0.
(This appendix does not have
error recovery procedures.)
The steps are keyed to the
steps
within
the body of this guide that describe how
to install the TOPS-20 software on a new DECSYSTEM-24.

Appendix C

contains
the
steps
for
installing
TCP/IP-28,
pointers to various chapters within this guide.

Appendix D

contains the steps for generating a batch and

(GALAXY)

system tailored

for your particular

with

spooling

site.

DOCUMENTS

The following manuals are valuable
as
references
while
wusing
this
guide.
All
of
these
manuals
are included in the TOPS-28 Software
Notebook

Set.

TOPS-2@ Commands
TOPS-2¢

Reference

EDIT Reference

TOPS-20 Monitor

Calls

Manual
Reference

TOPS-20

Operator's

Guide

TOPS-20

Operator's

Command

TOPS-20

System Manager's

TOPS-20

User's

TOPS-2¢

User

USING RECOGNITION

Manual

Language

Reference Manual

Guide

Utilities

Guide

INPUT

TOPS-20 offers a helpful
feature
to
prompt
you
when
you
type
a
command.
Simply
type
the
first few characters, and then press the
ESCape key.
This tells TOPS-20 to examine the
characters
you
typed
and
to
<complete
the
command
for
you.
If TOPS-20 recognizes the
characters you typed, it completes as much of the command as
it
can.
When it cannot print any more or does not recognize the characters you

viii

typed

as part of a valid command,
TOPS-20
rings
the
terminal
(your
terminal
bell
may
be
a
buzzer)
and
waits for you to
additional characters.
If you type part of a command that means
than one thing to TOPS-20, it rings the terminal bell to indicate
it needs more information.
Using the ESCape key in these ways is
you use the TOPS-20 feature called recognition input.

When you use
parentheses.

recognition input, TOPS-20
also
prints
These
words,
called quidewords, make

readable

also

and

tell

you

kind

argument

type
more
that
how

some
words
in
the command more

TOPS-2@

expects

you

type.

In this guide, commands
appropriate arguments.

SBUILD
If

what

bell

you

use

are
For

PS:<OPERATOR>
recognition

shown as
example:

complete

words

followed

the

<RET>

input

for

this

command,

looks

this:

<ESC>

SBUILD
Using
Here

(DIRECTORY NAME)

recognition
is

another

input

PS:<OPERATOR>

provides

the

<RET>

guidewords

(DIRECTORY NAME).

example:

SCOPY PS:<SYSTEM>FILE.CMD PS;<0PERATOR>FILE.CMD <RET>
Using

recognition

input,

the

command

<ESC>

$COPY

looks

this:

<ESC>

(FROM)

PS:<SYSTEM>FILE.CMD

(TO)

PS:<OPERATOR>FILE.CMD <RET>

If you type accurately, the command lines shown in this guide will
be
accepted and interpreted correctly by TOPS-2@8.
If you choose, you can
use recognition input.
In most cases, if you
press
the
ESCape
key
after
you
type
a
command
or
an
argument,
TOPS-2¢0
will provide

guidewords

instruct

you to

press

the

RETURN key.

Recognition
input
offers
several
advantages.
First,
you
can
double-check
your typing, because the completed command as printed by
TOPS-20 verifies that your
typing
has
been
interpreted
correctly.
Second,
you
<can
minimize
typing, because you need only type enough
characters to make a unique match with a
command
or
argument.
And
third,
TOPS-20
prompts
your
next
response,
because
it
prints
guidewords in parentheses.

HOW TO

USE

THIS

GUIDE

Before using this guide, read Getting Started With TOPS-24.
Also
be
familiar with the information in the TOPS-2@ User's Guide, the TOPS-20
System Manager's Guide, and the TOPS-2¢ Operator's Guide.
If you are installing a new system, read Chapters 1 through 7.
are
updating an existing TOPS-20 system, read Appendix A.
If
installing a system with TCP/IP capability, read Appendix C.
are generating a tailored GALAXY, read Appendix D.

If
you
If

you
are
you

The

following

conventions are

used

this guide:

Indicates

Symbol
<RET>

The

RETURN

key.

<ESC>

The

ESCape

(ESC,

The

ENABLEd

prompt or the

The

subcommand

Pressing the CTRL (CONTROL) key and
key
simultaneously.
The backslash

ALT,

ALTMODE,

Pressing

the

echo of

PREFIX)
the

key.

ESCape

key.

prompt.

near the
key
1labeled
console terminal (CTY).
<CTRL/x>

CTRL

LINEFEED

(CONTROL)

key

the
key

backslash
is located

and

your

another

key

simultaneously.

The
echo
of
<CTRL/x>.
For
example,
pressing
<CTRL/Z>
echoes
as
“Z.
Note
that
pressing
<CTRL/x> does not always
echo
with
“x
on
your
terminal.
For example, <CTRL/\> has no echo.
@

The

TOPS-20

prompt.

UPPERCASE

Actual input required in a
command
string.
You
must
type an uppercase element in full or with an
abbreviation

acceptable

the

system.

lowercase

An
input
wvariable
in
a
command
example,
name
or
number).
These
that you must determine.

Spaces

Separate
input

command.

Spaces

must

shown.

A list of alternatives within a command.
You must
specify
one
of
the alternatives in your command
string.
Do not type braces in the actual
command
string.

{}

That
are

Bold

elements

where

string
(for
are variables

What

some of
not

you

uppercase
Regular

the

lines

the

example

figure

shown.

What
the
terminal

type
or

your

lowercase

system
prints
(in
either

characters).

terminal

(in

either

characters).

or
displays
uppercase
or

at
your
lowercase

The commands you must type are in bold print.
If you type accurately,
all
you
have to do is perform the indicated function and verify that
your actual terminal output resembles the sample output.
Be
sure
to
include
the spaces shown in the command lines.
Remember that systems
differ
in
memory
size
and
peripherals,
so
steps
that
describe
configuring
memory,
1initializing
1line
printers and disk packs, and
assigning logical unit numbers to tape drives, require you to type the
values that are correct for your system and not the sample parameters.

If your terminal output does not resemble
the
sample
read
ALL
of the instructions after the word "Error,"
recovery procedure that corrects your problem.

output,
first
then choose the

NOTE

The version and
edit
numbers
1in
this
guide
could
differ
from
those
printed on your console terminal.
The numbers printed on your console must be
or greater than the numbers in this guide.

Time

estimates

are

included

that

you

know about

equal

how

¢to

1long

step

takes.
Times are estimated to the nearest minute, so don't worry if a
step takes somewhat longer or shorter than this.

CHAPTER

INTRODUCTION

This introductory chapter describes collecting information before
you
start
an
installation,
what
tools
you
will
need,
the
monitors
available to you, and information on GALAXY.

When installing the TOPS-20 software on a
DECSYSTEM-2@
model
number
2060
or
on
a
DECSYSTEM-2¢
model number 204¢S, you should be using
software package QT@23, which contains the Installation tape
and
the
Distribution
tape.
(The installation of a DECSYSTEM~-20 Model 2065 is
identical to that of
a
DECSYSTEM-20
Model
20640.
Throughout
this
guide, Model 2060 will be used to designate both Model 20608 and 2065.)

NOTE

Before starting the
installation,
read
the
1listing
labeled
TOPS20.BWR,
which accompanies your software.
The TOPS2@.BWR file describes changes in the
software
and
installation
procedures
made
too
late
for
inclusion in this guide.

l.1

COLLECTING

INFORMATION

A DIGITAL Field Service Representative will install your
DECSYSTEM-20
hardware
and
inform
you when the system runs diagnostics correctly.
Before he leaves, you need to obtain the following information:

1.1.1

The channel,

A list of terminal

The

serial

The

unit number

Disk

unit,

and controller number of each disk drive.
line numbers and

number of each magnetic
and

line speeds.
tape drive.

type of each line printer.

Drives

You need to know the channel, unit, and controller number of each disk

drive,
and
whether
it is dual-ported.
The controller number for an
RP@P4, RPP6, and RPP7 is -1l.
The controller number for
both
an
RA6%
and
RA81
1is 7.
RP2@g disk drives have a different controller number.
The unit number is located on the display panel on the drive.

The DECSYSTEM-20 dual-ported disk drives are connected to both the CPU
and
- the
front-end
processor.
In
a
common
file
system
(CFS)

environment,

dual-ported

disks

may

1-1

connected

another

INTRODUCTION

DECSYSTEM-208.

When

ported

system

drives

with

one

the

processor.

doing

same

an
the

unit

Remember

that

installation,
other.

number
it

are

1is

these
error

connected

possible

for

disks
if

to
RP@4,

two

should

dual-ported

the

front-end

RP@F6,

and

RP@A7

disks to be dual-ported to two different channels on the same
system.
The
procedures
1in
this
guide assume that the unit on which you are
installing the front-end software is Unit @#.
Use the following
chart
to

record

the

necessary

information.

Disk
Type

l1.1.2

Channel

Terminal

Unit

Drives

Controller

Dual-Ported

Lines

You need a list of terminal line numbers and line speeds.
Use these
numbers
1in
Section
3.3.1
when you set the default terminal speeds.
Also, find out which lines are remote
so
that
you
can
define
the
remote
1lines
as described in Section 3.3.2.
Use the following chart
to record this information.

Lines
Auto

Line

Speed

Auto

Remote?

Line

Speed

Remote?

INTRODUCTION

NOTE

the

that
declares
The word Auto over the word Speed
line is an autobaud line (see Section 3.3.2).

l.1.3

Magnetic

Tape Drives

Use
drive.
You need to know the serial number of each magnetic tape
Section 3.3.4 to define magnetic tape logical unit
in
these numbers
The number appearing on the thumbwheel does not necessarily
numbers.
Use the following
correspond to the logical unit number of the drive.
chart

record

this

information.

Magnetic

Serial #

Type

Serial #

—————————

——

—————————

— —

—————— - —

o wam

——

————————

- o — -

—————————

——— v

—— -

- - -

—

Tapes

Type

Serial #

———

—— o

——

- — - 2

- Sw-

— -

———— v > -

——

v —

- ——

- - —

————

— —
-

- — . — - o -

—

— -

Type

NOTE

The serial numbers on TU78 and/or TU71 tape drives are
These factors consist of
three factors.
up of
made

a
and
number,
DX20
the
number,
channel
the RH2@
Assuming that the RH20
number.
unit
tape
two-digit
channel number is 2, the serial number for tape unit 3

would

2¢03.

In this example, the RH20 channel is

second
the
is
number
the first digit (2), the DX2¢
and the last two digits are the tape unit
(@),
digit
drive
The serial number for a TU72 tape
number (#3).
can be found on the back of the tape drive.

1.1.4

Line

Printers

this
Use
You need the unit number and type of each 1line printer.
the
Use
printers.
line
the
initialize
to
3.3.5
Section
in
information
following chart to record this information.
Line

Unit #

Model

Printers

Lowercase ?

Programmable

VFU ?

INTRODUCTION

1.2

INSTALLATION TOOLS

You need

the

following

tools

install

the

TOPS-28

software

DECSYSTEM-20:

The

TOPS-2@

RSX-20F

Version

15-21

System

Floppy A.

The

TOPS-2@

RSX-2@F

Version

15-21

System

Floppy

The

TOPS-20 RSX-20F

Version

15-21

System

Floppy

e¢

The

TOPS-20

Version

6.1

Installation

tape.

The

TOPS-20

Version

6.1

Distribution

tape.

A separate
purchased.

Formatted
ask
your
for you.)

tape

for

each

disk packs.
(If your
DIGITAL Field Service

RP20

l.2.1

you

software

product

disk packs are
Representative

you

have

not formatted,
to format them

Disks

are

installing
the
TOPS-20
software
on
Model
2040s
or 206@, that contains
disk subsystem, be sure you
have
Floppy
C,
floppy
disk contains the microcode necessary
the RP24.

DECSYSTEM-20,

RP2¢
this
boot

as
to

Floppy

Disks

System Floppy A contains the
an RP@4 or RP@6 disk pack.

System Floppy B contains
install and maintain the

files

the
files
software on

System Floppy C contains the
RP20/DX2@% microcode files.

1.2.2

optional

RSX-20F

boot

the

central

processor

from

for
various
functions
a DECSYSTEM-20.

wused

Version

and

the

15-21

map

file

Tapes

The TOPS-20 Installation tape,
for
DECSYSTEM-2@0s
Models
20608,
contains
the
TOPS-20 monitor and related programs.
are:

The

TOPS-20

monitor

(SAVE

The

TOPS-2@

command

processor

The

DLUSER

The

data

DUMPER

program

(SAVE

(ASCII

file)

program

(SAVE

format)
(SAVE

format)

2040S
and
The files

INTRODUCTION

Four

for

DUMPER

the

savesets

following

recorded

1608

bpi

DUMPER

format

directories:

PS:<SYSTEM>

for

the

monitor

PS:<SUBSYS>

for

the

system

and

program

programs.

files

and

the

GALAXY

files.
-

The

PS:<UETP.LIB>

for

the

UETP

files.

TOPS-2@ Distribution
tape
for
all
DECSYSTEM-20s
contains
the
bundled software.
There are four DUMPER savesets recorded at

TOPS~-20

1600

bpi
e
e

DUMPER

Saveset

format.

Savesets

contains
2

through

software in
the monitor

the
and

documents
4

contain

directories
the TOPS-20

about

the

source

software.

files

needed

<SYSTEM> and <SUBSYS)>,
command processor.

build

the

except

for

NOTE

The term "bundled software" refers to the contents
of
the
Installation
and
Distribution
tapes considered
together, or to the contents of the Distribution
tape
alone.
The
term
"unbundled software" refers to the
contents of the tapes for optional software products.

1.3
Two

THE

TOPS-20 MONITORS

monitors

are

DECSYSTEM-20,

distributed

Models

2040S

and

with

the

TOPS-20

206@.

They

are:

software

for

the

2060--MONBIG,.
EXE
2060-MONMAX.
EXE

Read
will

Chapter 3 for
proceed more

you

want

1,4

THE

descriptions of
smoothly if you

these monitors.
take time now to

The
installation
choose the monitor

use.

BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM

Your TOPS-2@ software system initialization includes a standard GALAXY
batch
and
spooling system.
If you need a special batch and spooling
system, first install the standard system; then refer to Appendix D of
this
manual
for
instructions
on
how to build your own specialized
batch and spooling system.

CHAPTER
CREATING

THE

TOPS--2¢0

FILE

SYSTEM

This chapter describes how
DECSYSTEM-20.
To
create

to create a new TOPS-20 file system on
the
a new file system, you must load and start
initialize the file system, restart the
monitor,

the TOPS-2@ monitor,
and

restore

the

bundled

STOP:

software

These

from

Procedures

tape.

Install a New System

Follow the procedures
in
this
chapter
if
you
are
installing TOPS-20 software on a new system, or if you
are creating a new file system on a set of disk packs.
Use
Appendix
A
to
update
TOPS-20
software
on an
existing

2.1

The

system.

CHECKING THE TOPS-2@0

SOFTWARE

PACKAGE

TOPS-20 software package contains the

items:

The

TOPS--2@ RSX2@F Version

15-21

System

Floppy A.

The

TOPS-2# RSX2@QF Version

15-21

System

Floppy B.

The

TOPS-2@ RSX2@F Version 15-21

The

TOPS-20

The TOPS-20 Distribution Tape Version 6.1.

A separate

magnetic

System Floppy C.

Installation Tape Version 6.1.

tape

Be sure that you have
Sections
1.2.1
and

2.2

following

for each optional

software product purchased.

all
of
these
items.
Refer
1.2.2
for
the contents of the

to
Chapter
1,
floppy disks and

tapes.

PREPARING THE

DECSYSTEM-2#

FOR

INSTALLATION

You prepare the system for installation by powering
it
up,
checking
for
formatted disks, and labeling the disk packs.
You then mount the
disk packs and turn on the disk drives; mount the
floppy
disks;
and

mount

the

Installation

Perform Steps

tape.

1 through 9

to prepare for

installation.

CREATING THE TOPS-2¢0 FILE SYSTEM

mpsStep 1:

Read the listing labeled TOPS20.BWR.

minute
last
any
about
Read the listing labeled TOPS20.BWR to learn
changes made to the installation procedure or to the TOPS-20 software.
mp Step 2:

Ask your DIGITAL Field Service
packs

are

Representative

the

disk

formatted.

Ask your DIGITAL Field Service Representative if the
disk
packs
are
formatted
for use with the DECSYSTEM-2¢.
If they are not, ask him to
format them.
The packs must be formatted before you proceed
further.
Note

that

mp Step 3:

you cannot use

an RP2@

for

the

system structure.

Power up the system.

Turn on the power by pressing the POWER switch if the light under
the
word
POWER
on
the
operator's
panel
1is
off,
(Do
not touch the
emergency power switch unless you see smoke or sparks coming from
the
system.)
The system is ready after a few seconds, and the power light
comes

on.

sure

that

the

is completely powered

on:

Check

Check the magnetic tape drives.
If power is off,
press
the
rocker
switch (the white switch containing the ON/OFF light)
on the front panel.
If you have trouble with the disk drives
or
magnetic
tape
drives,
<call
your DIGITAL Field Service
Representative for assistance.

Check the line printers.
If power is off
for
an
LP20A
or
LP20B printer (which has four buttons on the right of the top
panel), reset the knee-level breaker on the lower panel.
The
TAPE
1light may be on; disregard it.
If you have an LP2@F or
LP2@H printer (which has four rocker switches on the left
of
the
top
panel),
1ift
the
cover just above the lights and
reset the breaker.
Be sure that the printer has paper.

the disk drives.

Turn on
line

’Steg 4:

system

the

and

Label

console

has

terminal

(CTY).

sure

that

1is

paper.

the disk packs.

This qguide contains the procedures for creating the
system
structure
for
your
system.
The
system
structure
name
can
be
up
to six
characters and contains the files
needed
to
run
the
systen.
The
system
structure
cannot include RP2#, RA81, or RA6# disk drives.
If
the system structure is on an RP@7
disk
drive,
the
front-end
file
system must reside on a RP@4 or RP@6 dual-ported disk drive.

Decide how many packs you
will
have,
and
assign
them
consecutive
"logical
wunit
numbers," starting with @.
These are the logical pack
numbers referred to in Step 25.
1Identify each pack by
writing
these
numbers
with a felt-tip pen on the pack cover with a gummed label.
A
sample

the

TOPS-2@

format of

Disk

Structure

Logical

1D:

Unit:

the

label

Pack
structure

name

is:

CREATING

THE

TOPS-20

FILE

SYSTEM

CAUTION
Do

not

Itself,
damage

.’“gggg 5:

Mount

disk

the

use

a gummed

because
to

the

label

the

surface

spin

off

and

the

cause

pack

severe

drive.

the RP@4 or RPP6
packs

can

the

are similar in appearance
RPP6 written on the upper

disk

proper

but can
surface

pack.

drives.

RP@4

and

RP@6

disk

packs

be distinguished by the name RP@4 or
of the pack.
Make
sure
vyou
place

one

pack
on
the drive that is unit @, dual-ported, and connected to
the front end.
The installation procedure stores the
files
used
by
the
front
end on this pack.
After the installation is complete, you
can dismount
the
disk
packs
to
clean
and
maintain
the
drives.
However, during system operation, the pack that contains the front-end
files must be on dual-ported drive # as it was during installation.
NOTE

|
|

RP@7 and RP2§ disk packs are non-removable.
an RA60 disk pack refer to the HSC-50 User's

To
mount
Guide.

Be careful when mounting a disk pack because the drive
shaft
«can
be
damaged if the pack is jammed off center into the drive.
Follow these
instructions when mounting a pack:
l.

If another RP@4 or RPP6 disk is
and spinning, do the following:
a.

Press

the

START/STOP

already mounted

button

and

wait

until

the

drive

the

drive

stops.

Push the
pack.

door

Turn

cover

the

turns

there

back.

handle

freely.

any

and

bottom

pack

cover

counterclockwise

lift

turn

the

lift

again.

the

drive

cover.

Lift the pack out of
protective

the

Gently

resistance,

counterclockwise

Slide

few

pack

handle

and

sure

down

turns

the

until

vertically.

1If
turns

few more

place

that

over

the

cover

the

clicks

closed.

Pick up the pack to be
mounted
and
bottom cover by squeezing the handle

remove
the
of the bottom

protective
cover.

CAUTION

If you
bottom

insert a
pack
without
removing
the
cover,
you
will be unable to use or
the pack.

remove

Gently

lower

careful

not

the

pack

handle clockwise about two
full
turns.
You
resistance
roughly equal to the power steering

will
on a

When

damage

the
will

resistance
result.

lowering

increases

the

drive.

Keep

being

Turn
feel

while

drive,

pack

car.

sides

the

drive

the

into

centered

the

hit

vertically

the

the
a

it.

noticeably,

stop

turning

CREATING THE

TOPS-2¢

FILE

SYSTEM

Lift off the cover vertically.

Start the drive by pressing the START/STOP button.

the drive.

the door to

The

disk

(On an
be used when the READY light comes on.
to
ready
is
RP@6 the DOOR LOCKED light ensures that the disk
is
mounted

properly.)

protected.

Be sure that the drive is not write

labeled WRITE

switch

The

PROTECT must be off.

CAUTION

Do not leave a disk pack or magnetic tape
on
The vibration from the
of a disk drive.
top
the
to
fall
drive can cause these items to
floor,
causing
expensive
and
irreparable
damage.

.’Eflep 6:

Check the CONTROLLER SELECT switches on the disk drive.

Be sure that the CONTROLLER SELECT switch on dual-ported
drive
@
1is
set to A/B and that every other drive has the CONTROLLER SELECT switch
set to A.
To change the CONTROLLER SELECT switch, set the
switch
to
the
desired
position
and
press
the STOP button to cycle the drive
down.
When the drive has stopped spinning, press the START button and
wait

for

»Step 7:

the

READY

Mount

light

come

on.

System Floppy A in drive 0.

Place the floppy disk labeled System Floppy A in the left floppy drive
(drive
@).
To
mount
a floppy disk, hold the floppy disk with your
thumb on the label.
Then with your thumb and the label facing upward,
slide the floppy disk into the floppy drive until it contacts the back
of the drive and stops.
Press down the bar until it clicks.
CAUTION

Make sure that the paper directory that
1is
sometimes
included
with
the floppy disk is not sticking to the
back of the floppy disk.
Failure to do so will damage
the floppy disk and the floppy disk drive.

mpStep 8:

Mount

In the

right

System

Floppy

System

Floppy B in drive 1.

floppy drive

(drive

1), place

the

floppy

disk

1labeled

B.
HINT

Be sure that you have mounted the floppy disks in
the
correct drives, or problems will develop in Step 12.

m) Step 9:

Mount the Installation tape on MTA@:.

Mount the correct version of the Installation tape
for
your
system.
(Refer
to
Chapter
1
for
the
<correct
Installation
tape for your
system.)
Remove the write ring (if present) from
the
magnetic
tape

CREATING

THE

TOPS-2¢

FILE

SYSTEM

labeled TOPS-20 Installation
Drive
@
1is the lowest unit
TM@2

Tape and
mount
the
tape
on
drive
#.
on the lowest channel on the lowest TM@3,
or
DX20
controller.
(Your
DIGITAL
Field
Service
gives
you this information.)
If you cannot determine

controller

Representative

which drive
the one you

is drive @, make
want to use.

sure

that

all

drives

are

off

line

except

CAUTION

The
not

mount
l.

logical unit number for a magnetic tape
drive
|is
determined by the numbered thumbwheel on the left

side of TU45 drives.

The numbered

slave

drive.

the

this

thumbwheel.

reel

tape

Place

the

tape

facing

reel on
you.

the

setting

drive:

top hub

with

the

Press the LOAD button.
The tape
slowly
advances
onto
the
take~-up
reel and moves to the logical beginning of the tape.
If the
drive
overshoots
the
beginning
of
the
tape,
it
repositions itself.

Make

mount
1.

reel

Place
of

Lock
of

the

Press,

LINE

clockwise onto

button

1lit;

the

center

the
tape
heads
shields back for

take-up

the

reel.

is not,

press

the

button.

tape

the

reel

tape

the

front of
the head

the

sure

rocker

Wind

LINE

the

side

turn

by pressing

labeled

Thread the tape through the slot in
by
following
the
arrows.
Move
easier access to the tape slot.

one

hub

1is

the

tape

the

tape

change

Lock the reel
of the hub.

the

TU45

thumbwheel

Never

number

facing

reel

TU77
on

TU78

the

tape

top hub

drive:
with

the

1labeled

side

you.

the

hub

by pressing

in order,

the

RESET and

the

rocker

the

center

hub.

LOAD

buttons.

The

tape

wound
counterclockwise a few turns.
Then the tape leader is
threaded
automatically
through
the
slot
near
the
upper
right-hand corner of the drive, and the tape is positioned at
the logical beginning of tape.
Press

the

LINE

button.

On completion, the LOAD, ON LINE, and FILE PROTECT (FPT) lights should
be
on, indicating that the tape is positioned at the beginning.
When
the FILE PROTECT light is on, the system cannot write on the tape.
If
the
FILE PROTECT light is not on, remove the write ring from the back
of

the

tape.

CREATING

mount

2.3

reel

Place

tape

the

reel

of tape on the

side of

the

TU72

facing

FILE

SYSTEM

tape drive:

rightmost hub with the

you.

1labeled

Thread
the
tape
1leader
down
the
slot
until
it
is
approximately three inches in front of the read/write head.

Press, in order, the RESET, LOAD,
and
START
buttons.
tape leader is threaded automatically on the take-up reel
the tape is positioned at the logical beginning of tape.

To create

AND STARTING

the

Load

TOPS-20

front

the

end

Perform

19:

THE

file

system,

front-end monitor
to

initialize

you must:

the

from

MTBOOT to

into

memory.

load

the

floppy

disks.

processor

Use

and memory.

the

load the TOPS-2@
Magnetic
Tape
from
System
Floppy A into the

TOPS-2¢0

Use MTBOOT to start the
initialization routine.

Place

the

central

processor.

Use

steps

The
and

TOPS-20 MONITOR

Use the front-end monitor to
Bootstrap
(MTBOOT)
program
central

»Step

tape

TOPS-20

THE

through

the

front—end

Open the second door from
under
the
DECSYSTEM-20
switches.

monitor

TOPS-20

load

and

monitor

start

the

HALT switch in the

the left
control

side of
panel,

the
to

from

the

magnetic

file

tape

system

TOPS-2# monitor.

ENABLE position.

DECSYSTEM-2@,
access
the

directly
front-end

Be sure that the front-end HALT
switch
is
in
the
ENABLE
position
(Figure
2-1).
If
the switch is in the HALT position, move it up to
the ENABLE position.
When the HALT switch is in
the
HALT
position,
the front end will not operate.

.’Eflep

The

11:

Set

front-end

the

switch

control

panel

has

16 switch

(octal).

switches

2-1).
Set them to 000807 (octal) by setting switches 2, 1,
and leaving the rest down.
(Refer to the TOPS-20 Operator's
a detailed description of all switches.)

(Figure
and @
Guide

up,
for

Booting the front end from a floppy disk with the switch register
set
to
000007
causes
the front—-end monitor to run the central processor
initialization dialog.
This loads the central processor microcode and
configures central processor memory.

CREATING

mp Step 12:

THE

TOPS-2¢

FILE

SYSTEM

Hold ENABLE and press the SWITCH REGISTER button.

Hold ENABLE and press the SWITCH REGISTER button on the control
panel
(Figure
2-1).
This
loads
the
front-end
monitor
and
starts the
initialization dialog.
The system prints:
RSX-20F

VB15-21

12:00

[SY@:

redirected

[DX@:

mounted]

[DX1: mounted]
KLI -- VERSION

KLI

---

ENTER

13-NOV-84

DX@:]

VB15-15

DIALOG

RUNNING

[NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]?

KLI>

where:

Item

Identifies

RSX-20F
VB15-21
12: 99 13-NOV-84

The name of the front—-end monitor.
The version of the front—-end monitor.
The time and date that the front-end
was

SY@:

The area from which the front end obtains its
files.
If
SYP:
1is redirected to DX@:, the
front end obtains the files from floppy drive
@.
If SY@:
1is redirected to DB@:, the front
end obtains the files from disk drive 4.
The name and version of the central processor
initialization dialog.
The
prompt
for
the
central
processor
initialization dialog.

KLI
KLI>

Error:

monitor

built.

If the system does not print the above heading, be sure that
the
floppy
disks
are mounted in the proper drives and the
HALT switch is in the ENABLE position.
Then retry Step 12.
NOTE

The version and edit
numbers
in
this
manual
could
differ
from the numbers printed on your console.
The
numbers printed on your console must be
equal
to
or
greater than the numbers in this manual.

mpStep 13:

Type YES and press the RETURN key.

To enter the central processor initialization
dialog,
type
YES
and
press
the RETURN key.
Following this, if you answer either NO or YES
to this
question,
you
will
see
a
description
of
your
system's
hardware.
First comes the serial number (S/N) of the CPU, followed by
its type and power line frequency (either 58 or 60 Hertz).
Then comes
a
list of hardware options present on your system.
If an item is not
present, it will not be listed.
The example below shows all available
options.
Following
this,
the system prints KLI -- RELOAD MICROCODE
[YES,VERIFY,FIX,NO]?.

CREATING

THE

TOPS-2¢

FILE

SYSTEM

—LOAD SWITCHES —

DISK

ENABLE

SW REG | FLOPPY

FAULT POWER
LIGHT

LIGHT

POWER

SWITCH

2-1:

DECSYSTEM-20

Front-End

POWER OFF

ENABLE/HALT

SWITCH REGISTER

Figure

EMERGENCY

SWITCH

Control

Panels

CREATING

KLI

~--

ENTER

KLI>YES

DIALOG

THE

TOPS-2¢

FILE

SYSTEM

[NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]?

<RET>

KLl

KL1@

S/N:

KL1

—~-

KL10J

HARDWARE

MOS

21¢2.,

MASTER

MODEL

HERTZ

ENVIRONMENT:

OSCILLATOR

EXTENDED

ADDRESSING

INTERNAL

CHANNELS

CACHE

KLI

RELOAD MICROCODE

[YES,VERIFY,FIX,NO]?

KLI>

Error:

If the system does
the
floppy
disks
return

Step

not print the
are
mounted

above heading,
in the proper

be sure
drives,

that
then

12.
NOTE

For

DECSYSTEM~-20 Model
KLI

SELECT

PAGE

2@65,
TABLE

the

system

prints:

([FILE,BOTH,®9,1]?

KLI>

A Model 2065 has two page tables, whereas there is one
page
table
in
a Model 206@8.
Answer BOTH to utilize
this additional page table.
KLI>BOTH

<RET>

KLI

PAGE

KLI

~--

RELOAD MICROCODE

TABLE

SELECTED:

BOTH

[YES,VERIFY,FIX,NO]?

KLI>

DELETE

KEY

If you make a typing error, press the

erase
delete

mp Step 14:
|

a single character
the entire line.

at a

time.

DELETE

Type

key

Type YES KLX and press the RETURN key.

To load the central processor microcode, type YES KLX
and
press
the
RETURN
key.
After 30 seconds, during which the floppy drives click,
the microcode is loaded and the system prints KLI -—- MICROCODE VERSION
2.0[407)
LOADED
followed
by
KLI —-- RECONFIGURE
CACHE
[FILE,ALL, YES,NO]?.
KLI

~-- RELOAD MICROCODE [YES,VERIFY,FIX,NO]?
KLI>YES KLX <RET>
KLI ~- MICROCODE VERSION 2.0[407] LOADED

mp Step 15:
Go

Step
KLI

STOP.
if

the

system

~-- RECONFIGURE

Step
KLI

the

CONFIGURE

CACHE

system
KL

prints:
[FILE,ALL,YES,NO]?

prints:

MEMORY

([FILE,ALL,REVERSE,FORCE,YES,NO]?

KLI>

2-9

CREATING THE TOPS-2¢ FILE SYSTEM
‘Step 16:

Type ALL and press the RETURN key.

To reconfigure the central processor cache, type
ALL
and
press
the
RETURN
key.
Upon
receiving
this
reply, the system configures all
available cache.
After the
configuration
1is
c¢omplete,
the
system
prints KLI -- CONFIGURE KL MEMORY [FILE,ALL,REVERSE,FORCE,YES,NO]?.
KLI>ALL

<RET>

KLI

ALL

KLI

CONFIGURE

CACHES

ENABLED

MEMORY

[FILE,ALL,REVERSE,FORCE,YES,NO]?

KLI>

Error:

If the system does not print one of the headings
above,
be
sure that the floppy disks are mounted in the proper drives,
then return to Step 12.

mpStep 17:

Type ALL and press the RETURN key.

To configure
RETURN
key.

the central processor memory,
type
ALL
and
This answer configures all available memory

press
in the

the
most

useful manner and then prints a message indicating the results.
These
results
will vary, depending on the type of hardware you have.
Check
the two sample outputs below to see which one pertains to your system.
(Refer
to
the
TOPS-20
Operator's
Guide
for
details
on
memory

configuration.)
After
the
configuration
1is
complete,
prints KLI -- LOAD KL BOOTSTRAP [YES,NO,FILENAME]?.
KLI

KLI>ALL

CONFIGURE

MEMORY

your

size

MEMORY

INT

TYPE

gpo00008

768K

MF20

LOAD

your

output

will

resemble

one

CONFIGURATION

SIZE

[FILE,ALL,REVERSE,FORCE,YES,NO]?

system,

ADDRESS

KLI

system

<RET>

Depending on the
the following:
LOGICAL

the

KL BOOTSTRAP

CONTROLLER

[FILE,YES,NO,FILENAME]?

LOGICAL

CONFIGURATION

SIZE

INT

TYPE

CONTROLLER

go0o0003

128K

MB29

09400000
@2400008
03400000

512K
256K
3200K

4
4

MF20
10
MF20
14
NON-EXISTENT

KLI
Error:

MEMORY

ADDRESS

LOAD KL

BOOTSTRAP

([FILE,YES,NO,FILENAME]?

If the system does not print a heading
similar
to
one
those
above,
be
sure
that
the
correct floppy disks
mounted in the proper drives, then return to Step 1l2.
NOTE

The MOS memory configurator is capable of
configuring
4096K
of
memory.
The
message
concerning
the
NON-EXISTENT memory can be ignored.
This
message
1is

specifying
and

memory

the

difference

4096K.

between

the

actual

physical

of
are

CREATING

Bp Step 18:
After

prompt

---

KLI>,

LOAD

KLI>MTBOOT

KLI

TOPS-2¢

FILE

SYSTEM

Type MTBOOT and press the RETURN key.

the

KLI

THE

type

MTBOOT

KL BOOTSTRAP

and

press

the

RETURN

key.

[FILE,YES,NO,FILENAME]?

<RET>

-- WRITE

CONFIGURATION

FILE

[YES,NO]?

KLI>

The
system
now
asks
whether
it
should
write
the
front-end
configuration
file KL.CFG, which describes your current configuration
and the method you used to bring up the system (disk, floppy disks, or
magnhetic
tape).
If this file is written, the front end will attempt
to use the same method
and
the
same
configuration
when
you
next
install
or
reload
the
systen.
The default answer to the question
WRITE

CONFIGURATION

FILE

recommended
Later, when

that
you
you have a

(Step

1490

[YES,NO]?

YES.

Therefore,

answer
NO
to
this question for the
front-end configuration that should be

Chapter

4),

the

configuration

file

will

present.
recorded

written

for

you.

mp Step 19:
After

the
KLI

Type NO and press the RETURN key.
prompt

KLI>,

WRITE

KLI>NO

<RET>

KLI

BOOTSTRAP

type

and

CONFIGURATION
LOADED

press

FILE

AND

the

RETURN

key.

[YES,NO]?

STARTED

BOOT V11.0(311)
MTBOOT>

The front end loads
program
from
the
bootstrap
program.
seconds),

the

Error:

the central processor memory
with
the
bootstrap
floppy
mounted
on
drive
@, and then starts the
When
at
bootstrap
command
1level
(about
45

system

the

prints

system

KLI>

MTBOOT>.

prints:
?BOOTSTRAP

or any other error
disk
mounted
in
central

LOAD

message,
drive
@

processor.

Type

FAILED

you may have
the
wrong
£floppy
or you may not have stopped the

<CTRL/\>.

(The

is
near
the
LINEFEED
key.)
After 10
prints PAR>.,
Type the command ABORT and
key.
The
system
prints
PAR%,
which
processor
If

the

has

system

stopped.
prints

the

KLI

?BOOT

KLI

?BOOTSTRAP

FILE

KLI

ENTER

back

Step

following

NOT

key

(\)

seconds, the system
press
the
RETURN
means
the central
12.

message

exactly:

FOUND

LOAD

DIALOG

backslash

FAILED

[NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]?

KLI>

you either

have

the

recurs,

make

error

name

the

floppy
disks.
If
Software Support.

wrong

floppies mounted

bootstrap.
sure

that

the

you

error

2-11

back

have

you

Step

the

proper

contact

DIGITAL

mounted

continues,

mistyped

13.

the

CREATING

‘Step
To
and

2¢9:

Type /L and

load the
press

loads

the

press

TOPS-20

FILE

the

RETURN key.

TOPS-20 monitor from magnetic
the
RETURN
key.
The system

resident monitor,

MTBOOT>/L

[BOOT:

THE

skips

line,

SYSTEM

tape into
memory,
rewinds the tape on
and

prints

type
drive

/L
@,

MTBOOT>.

<RET>

LOADING]

[OK]

MTBOOT>

DX2@

Microcode

You
will
receive
a
message
concerning
the
DX20
microcode
ONLY
1if
you
are
installing
the TOPS-20
software on a DECSYSTEM-20 with an RP2@ tape
or
disk
controller.

Error:

If you made a
system prints
If you did
prints:
?NO

typing error and pressed the RETURN
key,
the
MTBOOT> again.
Reissue the correct command.

not

RDY

put

the

magnetic

tape

and

the

1line,

the

system

DRIVE

MTBOOT>

Place
If

the

tape

system

?BAD

FIL

FMT

EXE

DIR

the

line

prints

?BAD

one

give

command

again.

these messages:

following:

Make

Rewind

If
Error:

the

sure that you
have
mounted
the
<correct
TOPS-20
Installation
tape
on
drive
@ and that all other tape
drives are off line.

the

error

tape

and

recurs,

try giving

call

DIGITAL

If the system does not print
the name MTBOOT.
The system
KLI

?BOOT

FILE

NOT

KLI

?BOOT

LOAD

FAILED

KLI

ENTER

DIALOG

the

Software

MTBOOT>,

then

command

you
prints:

again.

Support.
probably

mistyped

FOUND

[NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]?

KLI>

the

floppy disks

MTBOOT

properly,

contact

DIGITAL

are
go

mounted

back

Software

Step

properly
12.

and
the

you

error

typed
recurs,

Support.

The system will use the
magnetic
tape
that
1is
on
line.
Check
to
see if you have more than one tape drive on line.
If so, press the ON LINE button to take each unwanted
drive
off line.
Try typing /L again.

CREATING

THE

TOPS-2¢

FILE

SYSTEM

NOTE

use
during
procedure is
intended
for
only.
If
you are trying to bring up a
monitor that has already been installed on
a
set
of
TOPS-20
disk
packs, refer to Chapter 5 of this guide
the
correct
or to the TOPS-20 Operator's
Guide
for

The following
installation

procedure.

.’Enep

21:

Type

/G143

and

press

the

RETURN

key.

routine,
type
/G143
the TOPS-20 monitor at

To start the TOPS-2@ file-system initialization
and
press
the
RETURN key.
The system starts
the file-system initialization routine.
MTBOOT>/G143

<RET>

[FOR ADDITIONAL
QUESTIONS.]
DO

INFORMATION

YOU WANT TO REPLACE

THE

TYPE

FILE

"?2"

TO ANY OF

SYSTEM

THE

FOLLOWING

SYSTEM

STRUCTURE?

Error:

you make

reissue

the

back

the

error

correct

and

the

system

system does not print MTBOOT>,
to

Step

system

?BAD

2.4

MTBOOT>,

check your

typescript.

12.

prints:
DIR

EXE

Try giving
an
error,

you probably typed the wrong command.
command
again.
If
you
still
get
Step

reprints

command.

the
/G143
go back to

12.

INITIALIZING THE TOPS-2¢ FILE SYSTEM

To initialize the TOPS-20 file system, you must d efine the name of the
system structure and the number and location of e ach disk pack that is
part

the

The

steps

system

this

structure.

section

initialize

TOPS -2

the

file

system

beginning

pointers

creating:

New home blocks (which contain
the file system).

The directory <ROOT-DIRECTORY> (which
all the directories in the system).

<NEW-SYSTEM>,
The
directories
<SYSTEM>,
<SUBS YS>,
<NEW-SUBSY¥S>,
<UETP>,
<UETP.LIB>,
<UETP.RUN>,
<ACCOUNTS>,

<SYSTEM-ERROR>,

Space

for

the

The
system
movement, by

<OPERATOR>»,

front-end

file

swapping
space
the monitor, of

and

pointers

the

¢ ontains

<SPOOL>.

system.
(the
pages

allocated
for
the
area
betwe en memory and disk).

CREATING

THE

TOPS-2@¢

FILE

SYSTEM

NOTE

Perform

Refer to
detailed

the

Steps

through

»Step 22:
To

TOPS-20
explanation

System
Manager's
of all the above.

initialize

the

Guide

TOPS-2¢

for

file

system.

Type YES and press the RETURN key.

create

the

system

structure,

[FOR ADDITIONAL

type

INFORMATION

YES

TYPE

and

"?"

press

TO ANY

the

RETURN

THE

key.

FOLLOWING

QUESTIONS.
]
DO

YOU

WANT

STRUCTURE?
DO

.}Step

23:

YOU

<RET>

DEFINE

WANT

Type

HOW

.’Step

24:

YOU

WANT

MANY

blocks
RETURN

MANY

ON WHICH
Error:

ARE

THIS

the

number

disk
the

ARE

THIS

type
the

THE

SYSTEM

RETURN key.
unit

SYSTEM

the

system

STRUCTURE?

YES

structure,

<RET>

and

press

the

RETURN

you
plan
to
have
and press the RETURN

STRUCTURE:

the wrong number of
system
prints PAR>

key.

1in
key.

your
The

system
example

<RET>

LOGICAL

PACK

MOUNTED:

disk packs,
type
(10 seconds), type

<CTRL/\>.
ABORT and

the RETURN key.
The system
prints
PAR%,
indicating
the
«central
processor
has
stopped.
Go
back
to
12

Type ?

and

start

again.

(do not press the RETURN key).

You must inform the system of the
to
be in the public file system.
controller, and unit numbers of
the system to print the channel

location of
If you are

each disk pack
not sure of the

each disk pack,
and unit number

type ?.
of each

that
is
channel,

This
causes
disk drive.

NOTE

The

type

STRUCTURE:

packs

packs
answer

STRUCTURE?

"CHANNEL,CONTROLLER,UNIT"

press
that

mpStep 25:

SYSTEM

for each
key.

PACKS

FILE

the

THE

If you
After

Step

THE

DEFINE

Type

Count the number of
structure.
Type
uses 1.
HOW

THE

YES and press

To write the home
YES and press the
DO

REPLACE

YES

example

shows

channel

and

specific
configuration.
The
will probably be different, as
your own system configuration.

unit

numbers

for

numbers for your system
they are
generated
by

CREATING

ON WHICH
[ENTER A

THE

TOPS-2@0

FILE

SYSTEM

"CHANNEL,CONTROLLER,UNIT" IS LOGICAL PACK # @ MOUNTED:
TRIPLE OF NUMBERS SEPARATED BY COMMAS THAT SPECIFY THE

CHANNEL,

CONTROLLER,

MOUNTED.

THE

AND

NUMBERS:

UNIT

AND

FOLLOWING

UNIT

UPON

LIST

WHICH

1,-1,9

;TYPE=RP06,DUAL

l,-1,1

;TYPE=RP06,0FFLINE,DUAL

PORT

l,-1,2
1,-1,3

;TYPE=RP@4,OFFLINE,DUAL
;TYPE=RP@7,0FFLINE

PORT

THE

VALID

APPROPRIATE

CHANNEL,

PACK

?
IS

CONTROLLER,

PORT

]
ON

WHICH

"CHANNEL,CONTROLLER,UNIT"

LOGICAL

PACK

MOUNTED:

all

system

NOTE

The

controller

number

always

-1

for

structures.

Error:

you

followed

the

procedure

Step

will
be
1listed
as
dual-ported.
Of
those that contain the packs that
are
structure
will be listed as on line.
be listed as off line.

exactly,

the
to
All

drive

remaining drives,
be
your
system
other drives will

If a drive that you want to use is not listed,
the
drive's
controller
select
switch is probably set to B.
Follow the
procedure in
Step
6 for
<changing
it
to
A,
Then
type
<CTRL/\>.
After
10 seconds, the system prints PAR>.,
Type
ABORT

and

processor.

’Step

26:

press

the

Return

If a
line

drive
and

Step

12.

Type

the channel

and

press

RETURN

Step

key

and

you want to use is listed
wait
for the READY light

the

number,

RETURN

halt

start

controller

the

central

again.

as
to

off line,
come on.

number,

and

turn it
Go back

unit

on
to

number

key.

Type the channel number, the controller number, and the unit number of
the dual-ported drive, and press the RETURN key.
You must answer this
question once for each disk pack.
If there is any problem,
ask
your
DIGITAL
Field Service representative to give you the channel and unit
number of each drive.
The controller number of all drives (except the
RP2@) is -1.
(The RP2# controller number cannot be -1 as it cannot be
used in the system structure.)
ON WHICH "CHANNEL,CONTROLLER,UNIT"
1,-1,08 <RET>
DO

Error:

YOU WANT

THE

DEFAULT

SWAPPING

LOGICAL

your

answer

1is

valid

but

MOUNTED:

SPACE?

If your answer is invalid, the system
messages
and
repeats
the question.
the current step.

<CTRL/\>.
ABORT
and
processor.

PACK

After
10 seconds,
press
the
RETURN
Go back to Step 12

not

the

prints one of
several
You can simply repeat

one

you

wanted,

type

the system prints PAR>.
Type
key
to
halt
the
central
and start again.

CREATING

mp Step 27:

Type ?

THE

TOPS-20

FILE

SYSTEM

(do not press the RETURN key).

To determine the default size of the swapping space for
type
?.
The system prints the default swapping space,
for a 20640.
If you are planning
refer
to Chapter 3
monitor you choose.
DO

YOU

[THE
DO

WANT

THE

DEFAULT

YOU

mp Step 28:

WANT

on using a monitor other than MONBIG
Section 3.1 for the correct swapping

DEFAULT

10070

THE

SWAPPING

SPACE?

DEFAULT

SWAPPING

YOU

WANT

THE

DEFAULT

SWAPPING

YOU WANT

THE

DEFAULT

SIZE

want
the

to specify the
RETURN
key.

need,

proceed

WANT

HOW

for the 2064,
space for the

SPACE?

Type YES or NO and press the RETURN key.

swapping space
for
Manager's
Guide.)
you

system,
is 10070

PAGES]

If you want to accept the default swapping
the RETURN key, and proceed to Step 34.

If you
press

your
which

YOU

MANY

Error:

your
After

Step

THE

PAGES

size
(The

SPACE?

FRONT

END

YES
FILE

size,

type

mpStep 29:

key
and

press

<RET>
SYSTEM?

the
TOPS-2f
System
of the swapping space

29.
SWAPPING

SPACE?

<RET>

SWAPPING?

If you type the
wrong
answer,
type
<CTRL/\>.
seconds,
the
system prints PAR>.
Type ABORT and
RETURN
Step 12

YES,

of the swapping
space,
type
NO
and
formula
for
determining
the proper

system
is
found
in
you determine the size

DEFAULT
FOR

space

to
halt
the
start again.

central

processor.

After
press

10
the

Return

Type the decimal number of pages and press the RETURN key.

Type the decimal number of disk pages you want to assign for
swapping
and press the RETURN key.
This option is provided so you can increase
the amount of swapping space in the future.
The default size
1is
the
maximum
amount
that
your present monitor will use for swapping.
1If
you decide to increase the amount used by the monitor in
the
future,
you
must already have assigned that much space on the disk during the
installation procedure.
Otherwise, you must repeat
the
installation
procedure
and
specify
the larger number.
The system will round the
number of pages specified up to an integral number of cylinders on the
disk.
To check the number
of
swapping
pages
for
selected, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.1.

the

For

Section

TCP/IP

correct
HOW
DO

installations,

number

MANY

PAGES

YOU

WANT

swapping

THE

FOR

refer

pages

SWAPPING?

DEFAULT

SIZE

Appendix

for
n

monitor

TCP/IP monitors.
<RET>

FRONT

END

FILE

SYSTEM?

C.5,

you

for

have

the

CREATING

Error:

you
?

type

THE

invalid

INVALID NUMBER

TOPS-20

number,

FILE

the

SWAPPING

and returns to the question
that
1is
wvalid
but is not

SYSTEM

system

PAGES

prints:

FOR

TYPE

DISK

type an answer
type <CTRL/\>.
After 10 seconds, the system
prints
PAR>.
Type
ABORT
and
press
the
RETURN key to halt the central processor.
Go back
to Step 12 and start again.

.Step 30:
To
If

Type ?

in Step 28.
the one you

THIS

If you
wanted,

(do not press the RETURN key).

determine the default
you already know what

size of the
the default

front-end file
system,
type
is, you can omit this step.

DO YOU WANT THE
[THE DEFAULT IS

DEFAULT SIZE
950 PAGES]

FRONT

END

FILE

SYSTEM?

DEFAULT

FRONT

END

FILE

SYSTEM?

YOU WANT

THE

SIZE

NOTE

If you are
structure,
file

mp Step 31:
Type

using an RP@7
disk
drive
as
the
system
do not reserve any pages for the front-end

system.

Type YES and press the RETURN key.

YES,

press

the

RETURN

key,

and

proceed

Step

YOU WANT THE

DEFAULT SIZE

FRONT END FILE

YOU WANT

DEFAULT SIZE

BOOTSTRAP AREA?

mpsStep 32:

Type ?

THE

DEFAULT SIZE BOOTSTRAP AREA?
64 PAGES]

DEFAULT

THE

<RET>

SIZE

BOOTSTRAP AREA?

Type YES and press the RETURN key.

It is recommended that you
and press the RETURN key.
DO

YES

are
assigned
as
the
default
boot
file
responds with the number of pages allocated

DO YOU WANT THE
[THE DEFAULT IS

mp Step 33:

SYSTEM?

(do not press the RETURN key).

To find out how many pages
space, type ?.
The system
for the boot file space.

YOU WANT

32.

YOU WANT THE
IS

THE

NAME

the

default

bootstrap space.

DEFAULT SIZE BOOTSTRAP AREA?
OF

THIS

YES

<RET>

STRUCTURE?
NOTE

proceeding

—

Before

System

—

D cnmy, S—

a——

WHAT

take

Manager's

structures.

with

Step

Guide

34,

for

refer

information

the

TOPS-20

~naming

Type

YES

CREATING

.’Efiep 34:

|
|

Type

THE

TOPS-20

FILE

SYSTEM

the name of the structure and press the RETURN key.

TOPS-20 recognizes any six-character name as a valid
structure
name,
Type
the
name of the structure and press the RETURN key.
The system
prints a message
to
indicate
that
the
structure
1is
successfully
defined and mounted.
The following examples use PS:
as the structure
name.

WHAT

THE

[STRUCTURE
[PS

NAME

"PS"

THIS

STRUCTURE?

SUCCESSFULLY

PS:

<RET>

DEFINED]

MOUNTED]

$SNO SETSPD.
$3NO SETSPD means that the system cannot run the SETSPD program.
is
expected
because
you have not yet loaded the SETSPD program
the file system.
This message can be printed at any time
before
system

requests

Error:

the

date

When

the

RETURN

» Step 35:
the

?PS

THE

PROBLEMS

problem

key.

has

prints

UNIT
YOU

HAS

WANT

type

yes

2.5

RESTARTING

and

.’Ewep 36:

system

ENTER

Type

the

message
BAT

TO WRITE

press

Type

System

been

back

ABOVE

corrected,

Step

12.

similar

to:

the
monitor
1is
1is write protected, for
message followed by:
BEEN

type

CORRECTED

and

YET:

press

the

BLOCKS
A

PROTOTYPE

BAT

BLOCKS?

key.

Continue

with

the

can

start

the

step.

THE MONITOR

the date

and

initialized,

you

system

press

the

format.
entered

For
as

time and press the RETURN key.

prints:
restarting,
CURRENT

date

and

wait...

DATE

time

AND

RETURN
Kkey.
Be
sure
example, 4:30 PM on
the
12-JUN-85 1634.
ENTER

SET

RETURN

Now that the file system is
performing Steps 36 to 42.

The

MENTIONED

while

STOP.

system

time.

If certain error
conditions
occur
mounting
the
structure
(a
drive
example), the system prints an error
?HAVE

and

This
into
the

CURRENT

DATE

TIME:

the

format

to
enter
twelfth

AND

TIME:

dd-mmm-yy

the
day

hhmm.

time
in
of
June

12-~-JUN-85

1638

Then

24-hour
can
be

<RET>

CREATING

The

system

responds

THE

TOPS-2¢

retyping

the

YOU

HAVE

ENTERED WEDNESDAY,

THIS

CORRECT

I}Enep 37:

FILE

SYSTEM

and

time.

date

12-JUNE-1985

4:30PM,

(Y,N)

Type Y and press

the RETURN key if the date
——

————

is correct.

S———
——

If the date and time are correct, type Y and press the RETURN key.
the date and time are incorrect, type N and press the RETURN key.
system again asks for the date and time.
YOU

HAVE

ENTERED WEDNESDAY,

THIS

CORRECT

WHY

(Y,N)

12-JUNE-1985

If
The

4:30PM,

<RET>

RELOAD?

CIag

If your system configuration does
not
ignore
the
following
message
when
monitor:
BUGCHK
COULD

"NOLODF"
NOT

FIND

AT dd-mmm-yy
CI-2¢

hh:mm

MICROCODE

LOAD

If you are installing CI2@, you
message, as the necessary files

mp Step 38:

include
CI20,
you
start
the

PROGRAM

can
are

also
ignore
this
not yet on disk.

Type NEW and press the RETURN key.

Type NEW and
question

press
is

the RETURN
entered

key.
into

The

text
the

you type
system

PS: <SYSTEM-ERROR>ERROR.SYS.
The TOPS-20 monitor
the
system
prints
<SYSTEM>ACCOUNTS-TABLE.BIN
VALIDATION
WHY

DISABLED and

RELOAD?

NEW

RUNNING

following
error

this
file,

starts
running,
and
NOT
FOUND
- ACCOUNT

DDMP.

<RET>

<SYSTEM>ACCOUNTS~-TABLE.BIN

NOT

FOUND

- ACCOUNT

VALIDATION

DISABLED
RUNNING

The

SYSJOB

system

ACCOUNT

DDMP

prints

VALIDATION

the

message

DISABLED

<SYSTEM>ACCOUNTS-TABLE.BIN
because

the

ACTGEN

program

NOT
did

FOUND
not

run.

(Refer to the TOPS-20 System Manager's Guide
for
more
information.)
The
system
runs
DDMP
and
then prints NO SYSJOB because the SYSJOB
program is not stored on disk.
Ignore this message as SYSJOB
1is
not
needed vyet.
Error:

If
you
type
question, the

prompts

an
incorrect
string
system prints the valid

you again

for

the

answer.

to
the
WHY
abbreviations

RELOAD?
and then

CREATING THE

TOPS-2¢

FILE

SYSTEM

Ethernet

If your
system
configuration
does
not
include
an
Ethernet,
1ignore the following message when you start
the

monitor:

BUGCHK

"KNICFF"

PHYKNI

AT dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss

CANNOT RELOAD THE

KLNI

If you are installing an Ethernet, you can also ignore
this
message,
as
the necessary files are not yet on
disk.

mp Step 39:
|

After

Type <CTRL/C>.

the system prints NO SYSJOB,
NO

type <CTRL/C>

to start a

job.

SYSJOB

<CTRL/C>
NO

EXEC

MX>

The
system
prints
NO
EXEC
because
the
file
PS:<SYSTEM>EXEC.EXE
(containing
the
TOPS-28
command
processor)
does
not
exist.
The
command processor is not needed at this point, so ignore this message.

mpStep 40:

Type G, then MTA@:.

Press the RETURN key.

The system is now at the miniexec command level, and you can type
any
miniexec
command.
Use
this
command
language
to load the TOPS-20
command processor from tape.
(Type <CTRL/U> if you want
to
erase
a
line while at miniexec command level.)

Type G.
The system prints ET FILE.
Type MTA@:
and press the
RETURN
key.
The
system
skips
over
the
end of the monitor save file and
prints

the miniexec

prompt

MX>.

EXEC

MX>GET

FILE

MTA@:

<RET>

MX>
NOTE

If you are using a tape drive other than tape drive @,
reply
accordingly in the following steps and/or error
recovery procedures, for example, MTAl:, MTAZ2:.

|
|

Error:

mpStep 41:

If you get a question mark (?) after
issuing
you can ignore this message and continue with

Again type G, then MTA@:.

the
command,
the next step.

Press the RETURN key.

To load the TOPS-2@ command processor from magnetic tape into
memory,
type
G.
The system prints ET FILE.
Type MTA@:
and press the RETURN
key.
The system reads the program from MTA@:
into memory and
prints
the miniexec
MX>GET
MX>

prompt
FILE

when

MTA@:

<RET>

finished.

CREATING

Error:

THE

TOPS-2¢

FILE

SYSTEM

If you get an error in the form "INTERRUPT AT
tape
could
be
bad or you may be specifying

drive.
call

Start at

DIGITAL

Step

Software

once more.

the

Support.

If you make a typing mistake and
system prints MX>.
Try again.

l}Step 42:

location," the
the wrong tape
errors continue,

press

the

RETURN

key,

the

Type S and press the RETURN key.

To start the TOPS-2@ command
processor
that
you
Jjust
loaded
into
memory,
type
S.
The system prints TART.
Press the RETURN key.
The
system prints the name and version of the
TOPS-2@
command
processor
and

the

TOPS-20

MX>START

prompt

(@).

<RET>

TOPS-20 Command processbr 6.1(273)

Error:

If the system prints INTERRUPT AT 1, you typed
only
one
G
command
to
the miniexec.
Repeat the command in this step.
If you still get the error, go back
to
Step
12,
If
the
errors continue, contact DIGITAL Software Support.
If

you

these

receive
error

Rewind

the

error message

recovery

the

INTERRUPT AT

681772,

procedures:

tape

manually

and

give

the

RETURN

following

commands
:
MX>GET

FILE MTA@:

MX>RESET

MX>GET FILE MTAQ@:
MX>START <RET>

Proceed

If you make a
system prints

Error:

Step

<RET>

43.

typing error and
MX>.
Try again.

press

key,

the

If many error messages
are
repeatedly
printed,
the
tape
could
be bad.
Press the front-end HALT switch and wait one
minute.
Go back to Step 12.
If the errors persist, ask for
another

2.6

<RET>

CREATING

tape.

SYSTEM

DIRECTORIES

With the system running, you must create directories to
store
system
files
and files for testing the system.
You create these directories
by running the DLUSER program from tape (Steps 43 through 46).

I}Step 43:

Type ENABLE and press the RETURN key.

To load files into
the ENABLE command
@ENABLE

<RET>

privileged areas and to
create
directories,
to obtain the required capabilities.

give

CREATING

|’»Step 44:

Type RUN MTA@:

THE

TOPS-20¢

FILE

SYSTEM

and press the RETURN key.

To run the DLUSER program from the
magnetic
tape,
After you issue this command, the system prints the

SRUN MTA@:

type
prompt

RUN
MTAQ:.
DLUSER>.

<RET>

DLUSER>

Error:

you

receive

files,
and
shows how to

error

reissue
do this

SREWIND MTA@:

SSKIP MTA@P:

SRUN MTA@:

message,

rewind

this
command.
for MTAQ:.

the

The

tape,

skip

following

two

example

<RET>

2 FILES <RET>

<RET>

DLUSER>

.Step
To

45:

load

type

Type
the

LOAD MTA@:

press

the

RETURN

from

the

tape

directory structure

LOAD MTA@:.

DLUSER

and

After

few

seconds,

the

key.

into

system

the

file

system,

prints

DONE.

and

the

prompt.

DLUSER>LOAD MTA@:

<RET>

DONE.
DLUSER>

Error:

you

key,

mistype
delete

reissue
If

the

the
the

the

and

have

not

entire

1line

typing

pressed

the

<CTRL/U>,

RETURN
and

then

command.

you mistyped

command

the

error

command

recovery

and

pressed

procedure

Step

the

RETURN

key,

44.

If you get a group of JSYS error messages, you probably
did
not
give
the
ENABLE
command
in
Step 43.
Type <CTRL/C>
twice, type ENABLE, press
the
RETURN
key,
and
give
the
following commands:

SREWIND MTA@: <RET>
?Device MTA@: open on JFN
$Close JFN? YES <RET>
3

MTAQ:

SSKIP MTA@G:
SRUN MTA@:

[OK]

2 FILES <RET>

<RET>

DLUSER>LOAD MTA@:

<RET>

DONE.
DLUSER>

.’.Step 46:
Type

EXIT

prompt

Type EXIT and press the RETURN key.
to

end

DLUSER>EXIT

the

DLUSER

($).
<RET>

program.

The

system

prints

the

ENABLEd

CREATING THE TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM

RUNNING DUMPER FROM

2.7

TAPE

the
1into
tape
files from the magnetic
The DUMPER program places
The DUMPER program is the fifth file on the
file system.
TOPS-20
Installation

Tape.

For the output from the DUMPER command FILES to print the

columns)

the

following command before starting DUMPER:

the

STERMINAL WIDTH 132

(132

width

rather than wrap after 88 columns, enter

CTY paper,

perform Steps

run DUMPER,

mpStep 47:

<RET>

Type RUN MTAQ:

47 and 48.

and press the RETURN key.

Since the tape
The DUMPER program is on the tape mounted on drive @#.
After
is already positioned at the DUMPER program, type RUN MTAQ@:.
the system prints the DUMPER prompt.

the DUMPER program starts,
SRUN MTA@:

<RET>

DUMPER>

Error:

If you get errors, the magnetic tape was either not recorded
Rewind the tape, skip
properly or not positioned properly.

The following lines show how to
four files, and try again.
If the errors persist, contact DIGITAL
for MTA@:.
this
do
Software

Support.

SREWIND MTA@: <RET>
SSKIP MTA@: 4 FILES
SRUN MTA@:

<RET>

DUMPER>

m) Step 48:

Type TAPE MTA@:

and press the RETURN key.

Tell DUMPER which tape drive to use by typing TAPE MTA@:.
then

prints

the

The

system

DUMPER prompt.

DUMPER>TAPE MTA@:

<RET>

DUMPER>

Error:

2.8

If you make a typing error, reissue the command.

RESTORING TOPS-2¢ BUNDLED SOFTWARE FROM TAPE

Restore the files for the directories
PS:<UETP.LIB>

from

the

tape.

PS:<SYSTEM>»,

PS:<SUBSY¥S>,

and

1if you
Give the DUMPER command FILES just before the RESTORE command
want the system to print the file specification of each file it
this
print
you
if
installation takes 1longer
(The
restores.
stop printing each file specification, give the NO
To
information.)
to
(Refer
FILES command after the current RESTORE command finishes.
messages
any
of
explanation
an
for
Guide
Utilities
User
TOPS-20
the

that DUMPER may print on your terminal.)

CREATING

THE

TOPS-20

FILE

SYSTEM

NOTE

This

procedure

tape

restores

structure

the

called

files
PS:.

on
If

the
in

guide you gave a structure name other
the
structure
name you specified in
the following steps.
For example:
RESTORE

Perform

Steps

l>'Step 49:
To

copy

through

Type RESTORE

RETURN
the

are

TOPS-2@

you

restore

and

<RET>

restored

the

bundled

structure

software.

PS:<SYSTEM>*.,*,*

its

files

return

PS:<*>*
% ,*

""SYSTEM

PS:<*>*
% %

monitor

DUMPER>RESTORE

End

being

this

and

press

programs

from

the

magnetic

the RESTORE command.
This command restores
saveset to the directory PS:<SYSTEM>.
When

restored,

Saveset

are

PS:,
type
of PS:
1in

Kkey.

tape to disk, type
files in the first
files

files

than
place

PS:<*>*%*
. * ,* F0O:<SYSTEM>

Note that the
called FOO:.

Installation

Step

FILES

into

FOR

the

DUMPER

the
the

prompt.

PGS:KSYSTEM>*.,*
,*

TOPS-20

all
all

<RET)>

V6.1""

PS:<SYSTEM>

Saveset.

Total

files

restored:

Total

pages

restored:

DUMPER>

Error:

you

the
from

"Loading
type

not

type

the

correct

input

structure,

tape is not positioned correctly, no
tape.
In this
case
you
will
not
files

<CTRL/E>,

Step

into
give

PS:<SYSTEM>."

the

following

PS:,

files
see

are
the

correct

commands,

and

restored
message

this

error,

begin

again

48.

<CTRL/E>
Interrupting...
DUMPER>>ABORT

Aborting

<RET>

RESTORE command...

DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>EXIT

<RET>

SSKIP MTA@: 4 FILES
SRUN MTA@: <RET>

<RET>

DUMPER>

Error:

If you do not type the correct structure and directory name,
PS:<SYSTEM>,
the files are restored to the wrong directory.
To correct this error, type <CTRL/E>, and give the following
commands.
Be

sure

directory.

Then
delete

reissue
and

the

expunge

RESTORE
the

command

files

1in

in
the

this

step.

incorrect

CREATING THE

TOPS-2¢

FILE

SYSTEM

<CTRL/E>
Interrupting...
DUMPER>>ABORT

Aborting

<RET>

RESTORE command...

DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>EXIT

<RET>

SSKIP MTA@: 4 FILES
$RUN MTA@: <RET>
DUMPER>TAPE MTA@:

<RET>

DUMPER>

.}.SteE 5¢:

Type RESTORE

RETURN

,*
PS:<*>*,*

PS:<SUBSYS>*.*.*

and

press

the

key.

Restore the system program files to the directory PS:<SUBSYS> with the
When all the files are restored, you return to the
command.
RESTORE
DUMPER

prompt.

DUMPERD>RESTORE PS:<*>*
% ,* PS:<SUBSYS>*.*.* <RET>
Saveset ""SUBSYS FILES FOR TOPS-20 V6.1""
Loading files into PS:<SUBSYS>
End

Total
Total

Saveset.

files
pages

restored:
restored:

n
n

DUMPER>

Error:

If you do not type the correct input structure, PS:,

tape is not positioned correctly, no files are restored
the
message
the
see
not
will
you
case
In this
from tape.
To correct this error,
PS:<SUBSYS>."
into
files
"Loading
again
type <CTRL/E>, give the following commands, and begin
at

Step

48.

<CTRL/E>
Interrupting...
DUMPER> >ABORT <RET>

Aborting

RESTORE command...

DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>DEXIT

$SSKIP MTA@G:

SRUN MTA@:

<RET>

FILES

<RET>

DUMPER>

Error:

files
the
If you forget to type the directory PS:<SUBSYS>,
Type <CTRL/E> and give
are restored to the wrong directory.
reissue
Then
the following commands to correct the error.

Be sure to delete and
this step.
in
command
RESTORE
the
expunge the files in the incorrect directory.
<CTRL/E>
Interrupting...
DUMPER> >ABORT <RET>
Aborting RESTORE command...
DUMPER>REWIND <RET>
DUMPER>EXIT

$SSKIP MTA@:

SRUN MTA@:

<RET>

4 FILES

<RET>

DUMPER>TAPE MTA@G: <RET>
DUMPER>SKIP 1 <RET>
DUMPER>

CREATING

|’.Step

5l:

Type

RESTORE

RETURN
To

restore

RESTORE
DUMPER

the

THE

TOPS-20¢

PS:<*>*
% *

FILE

SYSTEM

PS:<SUBSYS>*.*.*

GALAXY

command.

files

When

into

all

the

directory

files

are

press

PS:<SUBSYS>,

restored,

you

prompt.

DUMPER>RESTORE

Saveset

and

the

key.

PS:<*>%*
* &

""GALAXY

SUBSYS

Loading files into
of Saveset.

PS:<SUBSYS>*.*
,*

FILES

FOR

TOPS-20

type

return

the
the

<RET>

V6.,1""

PS:<SUBSYS>

End

Total
Total

files
pages

restored:
restored:

n
n

DUMPER>

Error:

you

forget

the

wrong

enter

the

files
and

RESTORE

the
|
|
|
|
|

PS:<SUBSYS>,

directory.
commands
1listed

command

files

type

the

this

step.

incorrect

the

system

restores

Type
Be

sure

delete

and

directory.

DUMPER>EXIT

<RET>

$SKIP MTA@G:

SRUN MTA@:

4 FILES

DUMPER>TAPE MTA@:
DUMPER>SKIP

DUMPER>

l’.SteE

<RET)>

<RET>

Type RESTORE PS:<*>*.*.,* PS:<UETP.LIB>*.*,*

RETURN
To

<RET>

restore

the

command.

key.

files

into

all

the

When

the

directory

files

are

<UETP.LIB>,

restored,

you

and

type

return

press

the
to

prompt.
S—

expunge

<CTRL/E>
Interrupting...
DUMPER>>ABORT <RET>
Aborting RESTORE command...
DUMPER>REWIND <RET>

DUMPER>RESTORE

PS:<*>*
% *

Saveset

""UETP

FILES

files

into

Loading
End

FOR

PS:<KUETP.LIB>*
. *_ *

TOPS-20

the

RESTORE

the

DUMPER

(RET>

V6.1""

PS:<UETP.LIB>

Tape.

—

S— —

the

<KCTRL/E> to stop DUMPER
below.
Then
reissue
the

—

Total
Total

files

restored:

pages

restored:

n
n

DUMPER>

Error:

you

example,

not

type

the

correct

input

tape

not

1is

structure,

positioned

PS:,

correctly,

for

files are restored from tape.
In this case you will not see
the
message "Loading files into PS:<UETP.LIB>."
To correct
this error, type <CTRL/E>, give the following commands,
and
begin again at Step 48.

CREATING THE TOPS--2¢

FILE

SYSTEM

<CTRL/E>
Interrupting...
DUMPER>>ABORT

<RET>

Aborting RESTORE command...
DUMPER>REWIND <RET>
DUMPER>EXIT <RET>

SSKIP MTA@: 4 FILES
SRUN MTA@: <RET>

<RET>

DUMPER>

.’.Step 53:

Type EXIT and press the RETURN key.

Type EXIT to end DUMPER.
DUMPER>EXIT

The system prints the ENABLEd prompt

(8).

<RET>

mpStep 54:

Type UNLOAD MTA@:

and press the RETURN key.

To remove the TOPS-20 Installation tape
UNLOAD MTA@:.

The system rewinds the

SUNLOAD MTA@:
$

the

tape

drive,

type

<RET>

You can now remove the tape
Error:

from

tape onto the source reel.

from the tape drive.

system prints:

$Device open in lower
$Kill lower fork?

fork

type YES and press the RETURN key.

The system unloads

your

tape.

m) Step 55:

Type INFORMATION DISK-USAGE PS:<*> and press the RETURN key.

system
the
PS:<*>,
DISK-USAGE
INFORMATION
If you give the command
The
the size of every directory on the public structure, PS:.
prints
2060.
model
example in Figure 2-2 was obtained using a DECSYSTEM-20,
You will notice that there are two directories called <KNEW-SYSTEM> and
These directories should have no files associated with
<NEW-SUBSYS>.
They were created by the monitor and will be used in the event
them.
TOPS-20 operating
the
you update your system to a newer release of
system.

Error:

not
do
directory shown
each
If the "Pages assigned" for
shown in this guide or the
value
the
approximately match
your
with
value derived from the directory listing shipped
have been copied
not
files may
some
tape,
Installation
files
four
Mount the tape again on MTA@:, skip
correctly.
and

begin

again at

Step

47.

CREATING

THE

TOPS-20

SINFORMATION DISK-USAGE PS:<*>

FILE

SYSTEM

<RET>

PS:<ROOT-DIRECTORY>

-874

Pages

+INF

Working

assigned
pages,

+INF

Permanent

pages

allowed

14 Pages assigned
+INF Working pages,

+INF

Permanent

pages

allowed

+INF

Permanent

pages

allowed

+INF

Permanent

pages

allowed

PS: <ACCOUNTS>

PS: <NEW-SUBSYS>

@ Pages assigned
+INF Working pages,
PS: <NEW-SYSTEM>

Pages

+INF

assigned

Working

pages,

PS: <OPERATOR>

Pages

250

assigned

Working

pages,

250

Permanent

pages

allowed

PS: <SPOOL>

@ Pages assigned
+INF Working pages,

+INF

Permanent

pages

allowed

pages,

+INF

Permanent

pages

allowed

1624 Pages assigned
+INF Working pages,

+INF

Permanent

pages

allowed

+INF

Permanent

pages

allowed

PS:<SUBSYS>

3111

Pages

+INF

Working

assigned

PS: <SYSTEM>

PS:<SYSTEM-ERROR>
1 Pages assigned
+INF

Working

pages,

PS: <UETP>

Pages

190008

assigned
Working

pages,

100000

Permanent

pages

allowed

PS:<UETP.LIB>

1632
4000

Pages assigned
Working pages,

4000

Permanent

pages

allowed

PS: <UETP.RUN>

@ Pages assigned
508 Working pages,
Total

58056

Pages

5508

Pages

free

$
Figure

2-2:

Directories

500

Permanent

assigned,

PS:,

17944

the

pages
12

Pages

Public

allowed

directories.

used.

Structure

CREATING THE TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM

2.9

CREATING THE DUMP.EXE FILE

To record system failures, create

Steps

through

the

DUMP.EXE

file

performing

58.

Type RUN PS:<SUBSYS>MAKDMP.EXE and press the RETURN key.

56:
mpStep

To create the DUMP.EXE file, which records any system

RUN PS:<SUBSYS>MAKDMP.EXE.
SRUN

failures,

The system prints the prompt MAKDMP>.

PS:<SUBSYS>MAKDMP.EXE

type

<RET>

MAKDMP>
NOTE

has,
system
your
If you do not know how much memory
HELP command and press the RETURN key after
the
type
of
MAKDMP prints examples
the system prints MAKDMP>.
memory size with the corresponding number of
physical
words.

mp Step 57:

Type CREATE PS: <SYSTEM>DUMP.EXE.l memory-size and press
RETURN

the

key.

To overwrite the existing DUMP.EXE file with a new DUMP.EXE file, type
Be sure to enter the total
PS:<SYSTEM>DUMP.EXE.l memory-size.
CREATE
2048K
wuses
example
The following
amount of memory your system has.
words as the memory size.

|
|

MAKDMP >CREATE PS:<SYSTEM>DUMP.EXE.1l 2048 <RET>
[Dump file: <SYSTEM>DUMP.EXE.1l created]

MAKDMP>

.Step 58:

Type EXIT and press the RETURN key.

Type EXIT to end the MAKDMP program and return to TOPS-20 command
level.

MAKDMP>EXIT

<RET>

$
NOTE

If in the future you add

your

some

additional

memory

system, you should recreate the DUMP.EXE file to

allow it to accommodate the additional memory.

CHAPTER

TAILORING

THE

SYSTEM

from
the bundled TOPS-2f software
installed
After you have
Installation Tape, tailor your system for your specific needs.
that is correct

the

for your system.

Select a monitor

Change

dial-up 1lines,
speeds,
Create system defaults for terminal
tape drive numbers, line
names, magnetic
system logical

the

system

name.

parameter
directory
2zone,
time
1local
printer parameters,
improvements,
performance
validation,
account
setting,
parameters,
scheduler controls, file archiving and migration

accounting shift changes, assigning
allocation,
tape drive
1line
remote
MSCP-served disk drives, daylight savings time,
system message levels, and network
controlling
conditions,
in the configuration
These defaults are set
information.
file.

command

and

Change

the operator's password

Create

the directory PS:<REMARKS>.

user group.

Create the PS:<SYSTEM>LPFORM.INI file.

3.1

SELECTING A TOPS-20 MONITOR

You
At this time you are running the TOPS-20 monitor 2060-MONBIG.EXE.
now select the monitor that most closely meets your system's
should
requirements.
1.

Choose a monitor that supports at least:

that
A monitor
system contains.
your
As much memory as
less memory than your system contains will not use
supports
all

available memory.

The number of terminal lines you need.
in this number.
operator's console
terminal

lines and

remote lines.

the
not count
Do
Just count the local

(one
two
The number of user jobs that you plan to run, plus
For example, if you expect to run
and job @).
job
operator
least
20 user jobs, the monitor you select should support at
22

jobs.

system
The
The number of pseudo-terminals that you need.
for the PTYCON
one
pseudo-terminals,
two
least
at
needs
program to run the operator program OPR and one for unplanned
situations that may arise.

3-1

TAILORING

THE

SYSTEM

For example, if you want to run five pseudo-terminals in your
batch system, you need a monitor that supports at least seven
pseudo-terminals.
5.
6.

The

number

The

number

peripheral
LAT

devices

(Local

Area

your

system.

Transport)

1lines

your

system.

All monitors
timesharing

are
and

stored in
the
directory
<SYSTEM>.
They
all
run
batch concurrently.
Do not select a monitor that has
fewer resources than you need, or
a
monitor
that
1is
unnecessarily
large.
The
TOPS-2f
monitors
and
their characteristics are listed
below.
Refer to Table 3~1 for the maximum structure size.

2060-MONBIG.EXE

A big
100
96
64
3¢
4AMEG

8
2
1l

120

timesharing

2060 ~-MONMAX. EXE

The

This monitor

supports:

jobs
lines
LAT lines
pseudo~terminals
of

memory

magnetic tape
line printers
card

drives

reader

million words
three
RP@6,
two

10000

monitor.

RA60,

pages

largest

for

of
one
one

disk
RP@7,
RAB8l)

swapping

storage
(six
RP#4,
three RP2@ spindles,
per

structure

space

timesharing

monitor.

This

monitor

supports:

128
128
128

50
4MEG

16
2
1l

120

15000

Table

Maximum

3-1:

Type
Disk

page

jobs
lines
LAT lines

pseudo-terminals
of

memory

magnetic

printers

card

reader

drives

million words of
disk
storage
(six
RP@4,
three
RP@6,
one RP@7, three RP2f spindles,
two RA60, or one RA8l) per structure
pages for swapping space

Structure

of
Drive

tape

line

Size

Max.
Per

No.

Packs

Structure

RPO4
RPO6

6
3

No.

Pages

Per

Pack

38,000
76,000

RP@7

216,376

RP20

201,429

RA60

94,516

RA81

200,928

512

36-bit

words

TAILORING THE

SYSTEM

for

In Steps 59 and 60, you choose the monitor most appropriate

needs and copy it

the

your

file MONITR.EXE.

Type CONNECT PS:<SYSTEM> and press the RETURN key.

mp Step 59:

Connect to the directory PS:<SYSTEM> by typing the CONNECT command.
SCONNECT PS:<SYSTEM> <RET>
$
TCP/IP Installations

If you are performing a TCP/IP installation, you must
After you
this time.
at
monitor
TOPS-2#
a
choose
restore the TCP/IP Distribution tape, you will be able
to choose a TCP/IP monitor.

.}Stqg 60:

Type COPY montyp.EXE.* MONITR.EXE.*

and

press

the

RETURN

ey.

Use the COPY command to copy the monitor that you have selected to the
"Montyp" designates the type of monitor you have
file MONITR.EXE.
When the copy is successfully completed,
system.
selected for your
The different monitors are
system prints an OK message.
the
2060-MONBIG.EXE and 2060-MONMAX.EXE.

$COPY montyp.EXE.* MONITR.EXE.* <RET>
montyp.EXE.n => MONITR.EXE.n [OK]

Error:

3.2

If you type the wrong name, reissue the command.

CHANGING THE SYSTEM NAME

Whenever a user types <CTRL/C> before logging in or gives the
INFORMATION VERSION command, the system prints a message similar to:
TOPS-2¢ BIG SYSTEM,

TOPS-2@ Monitor n.n(nnnn)

where n.n(nnnn) is the version and edit number of the operating
You can change the system name "TOPS-20 BIG SYSTEM" by
system.
If
name you want into the file PS:<SYSTEM>MONNAM.TXT.
the
entering
the name contains 1lowercase letters, give the command TERMINAL NO
RAISE before entering

the name.

For
The text of the system name can contain up to 105 characters.
it should not exceed 32 characters to fit on a
practical purposes,
single 72-character line of terminal output. Steps 61 through 63 show
how to change the system name to "Installation-test System" and how to
change the new system name to the abbreviated name "Instal-tst."

l’.Step 61:

Type TERMINAL NO RAISE and press the RETURN key (optional).

If you want lowercase letters in the system name, type the TERMINAL
command. Make sure that the CAPS LOCKED button on the terminal is up.
STERMINAL NO RAISE

<RET>

TAILORING

I’Step 62:

Type COPY TTY:
enter

the

Use the COPY command
enter
the
command,
your

system.

the

example,

After

the

SYSTEM

MONNAM.TXT and press the RETURN

system

Change the system name
PS:<SYSTEM>MONNAM, TXT.
characters.

THE

name

and

entering
The

type

the

key.

Then

<CTRL/Z>.

name

system

you

name

want
should

into

the

not

exceed

file
32

to give the
the system
you

enter

new system

system a new system name.
After
vyou
waits for you to type the new name of
the new system name, type <CTRL/Z>.
In

name

Installation-test

System.

SCOPY TTY: MONNAM.TXT <RET>
TTY:

MONNAM.TXT.1

Installation-test

System

“Z

$
You

can

name

change

only

when

mp Step 63:

this

file

the

monitor

Type COPY TTY:

any
is

time,

but

started

the

system

(whenever

you

reads
boot

the

system

system).

TAPNAM.TXT and press the RETURN key.

Enter

- E%e abbreviated system name and type <CTRL/Z>.

You should also
volume
header
Do
this
by

change

the system name that will
be
written
on
the
1label
of any tape initialized by users of the system.
entering
the
name
you
want
into
the
file

PS: <SYSTEM>TAPNAM, TXT.

This

system

name

must

contain

ten

fewer

characters, so you will probably have to abbreviate the name given
in
the
previous
step.
The example shows how to change the system name
(that appears on tape labels written by the system) to "Instal-tst."
Give

the

system

enter

the

system

name.

<CTRL/Z>.

abbreviated

the

SCOPY TTY:
=>

the

name

with

system

waits

you

enter.

the

example,

the

After

TTY:

command,

the

for

COPY command.

you

abbreviated

system

type

the

system

name

After

you

abbreviated
name,

type

Instal-tst.

TAPNAM.TXT <RET>

TAPNAM.TXT.1l

Instal-tst

“Z

3.3
You

CREATING
must

SYSTEM

create

Terminal
Magnetic

DEFAULTS

configuration

line
tape

speeds
drives

drives

Remote line conditions
Network information

The next time the system
Defaults)
program
uses
program

runs

CONFIGURATION COMMAND FILE

command

file

define:

Directory parameter setting
Performance improvements

Scheduler controls
Tape drive allocation
disk

THE

Logical names
Line printers

Local time 2zone
Account validation

MSCP-served

File archiving and migration
Accounting shift changes
Daylight

System

savings

level

time

messages

starts,
the
SETSPD
(SET
System
Parameter
definitions entered into this file.
This

the

automatically

system

startup.

TAILORING

THE

SYSTEM

The formats of the commands are described in
Sections
3.3.1
3.3.18
Steps
64 through 93).
You can include comment lines
are preceded by exclamation points.

through
if they

NOTE

The following sections
describe
how
to
create
the
configuration
command
file.
These steps illustrate
the use of the EDIT editor program.
You can
use
any
editor
of
your choice, as long as you accomplish the
goal

mp Step 64:

each

step.

Type CREATE 6-1-CONFIG.CMD and press the RETURN key.

Use EDIT to CREATE the 6-1-CONFIG.CMD file.
(Refer
to
the
TOPS-20
EDIT
Reference
Manual
for more information on how to use EDIT.) The
system prints the file name and the line number.

SCREATE 6-1-CONFIG.CMD <RET>»

Input:

PS:<SYSTEM>6-1-CONFIG.CMD.1

20100

Do not confuse the CREATE command, which
creates
a
file,
privileged “ECREATE command, which creates a directory.

3.3.1

Setting

Whenever
commands
lines to

Terminal

with

the

Speeds

the system starts, the
SETSPD
program
from
the
configuration
command file
the specified speeds.

reads
the
and sets the

TERMINAL
terminal

Users can change the speeds of their terminals by giving the
TERMINAL
SPEED command.
When one user logs out and another user logs in on the
same terminal, the system does not change the line speed back
to
the
default
listed
1in
the
configuration command file.
However, if the
line is defined as REMOTE, the speed is changed back after the line is
disconnected.
Note that the operator can change the speed of the line
by giving the privileged "ESET command.
To set the default speed for a particular line,
following format into the configuration command
TERMINAL

line

SPEED

input

enter
file:

command

the

output

where:

Item

Identifies

line

An octal line number, or a range of lines in
the
form
line-line.
Your
DIGITAL Field Service Representative
will provide you with a list of line
numbers
and
the
corresponding locations.
(Refer to Section 1.2.)

input

The

output

The output speed of the terminal(s).
If
you
do
specify
both output and input, the system assumes
the output speed is the same as the input speed.

input

speed

(to

the

system)

the

terminal(s).
not
that

TAILORING

Valid

terminal

speeds

(to

THE

SYSTEM

are:

shut

off

the

line)

300

600

75
110
134

1200
1800
2400

(actually

134.5)

150
200

4800
9604
NOTE

If you do not specify a speed for a line,
the
system
uses 300 for both input and output.
If you have lines
in the terminal controller (the
DH1ll)
that
are
not
installed,
you should define those lines with a speed
of
4@.
Otherwise,
the
1lines
run
degradation in system performance.
e

Line

numbers

Table

3-2:

are

always

octal

DECSYSTEM-20

(refer

Terminal

Number of Lines
(Decimal)

Line

open,

Table

causing

3-2).

Numbers

Line Numbers (Octal) for
Directly-Connected Lines

32
64

l
l

to
to

4¢
100

1490

128

200

’ Step 65:
Type
after

your

Type the TERMINAL SPEED gommands.
required

each

each with
Determine
terminals

TERMINAL

definition..

SPEED commands
You

can

include

an exclamation point.
The lines
the most useful definitions for
that you have.

and

press

comment

the
lines

RETURN
by

shown are only an
example.
the system according to the

00100
00200
20300
0400

! Terminal Speeds <RET>
! Line 1 has input=9600 and output=960@¢ <RET>
TERMINAL 1 SPEED 9688 <RET>
! Lines 2 to 20 have input and output=24¢@ <RET>

20500
20600

TERMINAL 2-20 SPEED 2400 <RET>
! Lines 23 to 40 are shut off <RET>
TERMINAL 23-40 SPEED @ <RET>

08700

key

preceding

go800Q

3.3.2

Defining

Dial-Up

(Remote)

Lines

For each dial-up line, you have the option of declaring that
1line
to
have a specified speed or you can declare a line to be autobaud.
If a
dial-up line is declared an autobaud line, the line
1is
automatically
set to 9600 baud at system startup.

TAILORING

To declare a line autobaud,
in
the
TERMINAL
command

THE

SYSTEM

replace the word SPEED with the word
AUTO
and
do
not
specify any input and output

speeds.

form
same
Use the
Include a TERMINAL command for each dial-up line.
Section 3.3.1, but insert the word REMOTE after the
in
described
as
line

number.

the
speed,
output
the
If you do not use the AUTO argument and omit
that the output speed is the same as the input speed.
assumes
system
The

command

format

is:

TERMINAL line REMOTE SPEED input output
or

TERMINAL line

REMOTE AUTO

Whenever a user starts a job on a dial-up line, and AUTO has not been
1line to the speed
that
of
speed
the
sets
system
the
specified,
in the configuration command

specified

file.

Define REMOTE lines.

mp Step 66:

If you have remote lines, obtain the line numbers

from

your

DIGITAL

the proper commands in the
Service Representative and enter
Field
each
after
Press the RETURN key
configuration command file.
You must determine
The 1lines shown are only an example.
definiton.
for

the correct commands

go800
30900

210080

your own system.

! Lines 21 and 22 are dialup lines <RET>
TERMINAL 21 REMOTE SPEED 9600 <RET>
TERMINAL 22 REMOTE AUTO <RET>

91100

Defining System Logical Names

3.3.3

system
Insert a command in the following format to define any special
These logical names are defined when
names that you require.
logical
the system starts.

The command

format is:

DEFINE name definition-list

The logical name SYS:
in

the

configuration

defaults to PS:<SUBSYS> if you do not define it
command

file.

Refer

Manager's Guide for descriptions of logical names.

wp Step 67:

the TOPS-20 System

Type the system logical name definitions.

into the configuration
Enter any system logical name definitions
The lines
Press the RETURN key after each definition.
file.
command

you
PS:<directory> indicates that
shown are recommended definitions.
Be sure to include the
a directory of your own choosing.
can use
structure
a
correct structure names for your system if you are using
name other

than

PS:.

TAILORING

01100
21200
21300
01400
31500
#1600

DEFINE
DEFINE
DEFINE
DEFINE
DEFINE
DEFINE

THE

SYSTEM

NEW: PS:<NEW>,SY¥S: <RET>
OLD: PS:<OLD>,SYS: <RET>
HLP: SYS: <RET>
SERR: PS:<SYSTEM-ERROR> <RET)>
DMP: PS:<directory> <RET>
POBOX: PS: <RET>

21700

3.3.3.1
Selecting an Editor - You have the option
of
default editing program (editor) with which your users
files using the CREATE and EDIT commands.
If you want

selecting
the
create and edit
them to use TV,

enter
the
command
DEFINE EDITOR:
SYS:TV.EXE into the
command file.
If you do not put this command into
the

configuration
configuration

command

file,

EDIT

will

the

default

defining

the

logical

override
your
choice
specify is available at
example

mp Step 68:
If

you

DEFINE

editor

for

the

making

the

name

EDITOR:

for

their

of
default editor,
your installation.
default

Type DEFINE EDITOR:

are

used

CREATE

and

commands

EDIT program.

using

EDITOR:

01700
01800

the

editor

own

jobs,

users

can

as long as the editor they
The following step
is
an

for

your

installation.

SYS:TV.EXE and press the RETURN key.

TV editor

your

system's

default

editor,

type

©SY¥S:TV.EXE.

DEFINE

EDITOR:

SYS:TV.EXE

<RET>

NOTE

you

EDIT

into

3.3.4

want

your

program,

the

Defining

system's
do

not

configuration

Magnetic

Tape

default
put

command

Logical

editor

DEFINE

EDITOR:

the

commahd

file.

Unit

Numbers

The

system assigns logical unit numbers to magnetic tape
drives.
It
starts with the lowest numbered unit on the lowest numbered controller
on the lowest numbered channel, and proceeds upward.
If
the
cabling
connecting
the
tape
drives
to the system changes, the logical unit
numbers referencing the tape drives can also change, unless you
enter
the
appropriate
commands
in
the
configuration
command file.
The
commands in this file gquarantee that the physical drives
always
have

the

same

logical

Request the tape
Representative,

unit

numbers.

drive serial numbers from your DIGITAL Field
Service
or open the back door of the magnetic tape drives and

look on the sticker containing the number.
The last 4 digits
of
the
serial number are the most significant.
Use only the last four digits
of the number to identify the
magnetic
tape
drive
in
the
MAGTAPE
command.
NOTE

SETSPD will not
recognize
tape
numbers longer than 4 characters.

drives

with

serial

TAILORING

|
|

To define
following

magnetic tape
format, in the

MAGTAPE

unit

serial

THE

drives,
use
configuration

SYSTEM

the
MAGTAPE
command file:

command,

the

slave

where:
Item

Identifies

unit

The
The

logical unit number to be assigned
to
unit number can be 4, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,

serial

The last four digits of
zeros can be omitted.)

the

serial

slave

The

for

example,

the

system

type

tape

drive;

the
drive.
or 7.

number.

TU72,

(Leading

TU45.

NOTE

the

l.»Step 69:

number

entered,

assumes

that

TU45.

Define the magnetic tape drive logical unit numbers.

Enter the definitions of the magnetic tape drive logical unit
numbers
into
the configuration command file.
Press the RETURN key after each
definiton.
The commands shown are only examples.
You must
determine
the correct definitions for your system.
01800
21900

MAGTAPE
MAGTAPE

02000

MAGTAPE

02100

MAGTAPE

02200
22300

MAGTAPE

3.3.5

Defining

Line

|
|

slave

24
2001
2002
2003
1500

TU45
TU77
TU71
TU78
TU72

Printer

Parameters

The characteristics of several line printers that can be
your
DECSYSTEM-20)
are
1listed
in Table 3-3.
Ask your
Service Representative which type you have.

Table

3-3:

Model

DECSYSTEM-2@

VFU

Line

ordered
DIGITAL

with
Field

Printers

Lowercase

Identification

LP2@A

PROGRAMMABLE

Four

LP20B

PROGRAMMABLE

YES

right top panel, with
the
top
button being POWER ON
ALARM/CLEAR.

buttons

LP2@C
LP2@D

PROGRAMMABLE
PROGRAMMABLE

NO
YES

Four
right

buttons
top panel,

on
with

top
button being
ALARM/CLEAR.
LP2@F

TAPE

Four

LP2¢gH

TAPE

YES

the

rocker

left

POWER

switches

the

the
the

top panel.

TAILORING THE SYSTEM

Sections 3.3.5.1 and 3.3.5.2 (Steps 70 and 71)

describe

the

PRINTER

commands.

3.3.5.1 Specifying the VFU File - The VFU (Vertical Formatting Unit)
For a line
is used to control paper advance through the line printer.
n
configuratio
the
in
command
a
place
VFU,
programmable
printer with a

For
file to program the VFU.
file that specifies the
command
is:
format
command
The
SYS:NORMAL.VFU.
use
installation purposes,

PRINTER n

LOWERCASE VFU dev:<dir>name.typ

where:

Identifies

Item

The unit number of the printer.

LOWERCASE

The printer has
in

the

The

VFU

set.

the

command

file

command.

type

file

specified

The location of the VFU file.

Examples of typical VFU commands in
are:

96-character

command.

dev:<dir>name.typ

the

the 64-character
has
printer
your
If
LOWERCASE
word
set, do not include the

configuration

the

VFU Command

Printer

PRINTER @ VFU SYS:NORMAL.VFU

LP24AC

LP2¢A or

PRINTER # LOWERCASE VFU SYS:NORMAL.VFU

LP2@¢B or LP20D

Note that you do not need

VFU

commands

for

LP2¢F

and

LP2¢H

line

printers.

Type the VFU command and. press the RETURN key.

.’Ekep 79:

If you have one or more line printers with

programmable

VFUs,

enter

the appropriate PRINTER commands in the configuration command file.
02300
22400

PRINTER
PRINTER

@ LOWERCASE VFU SYS:NORMAL.VFU <RET>
1 VFU SYS:NORMAL.VFU <RET>

22500

3.3.5.2

Specifying the RAM File - You must identify a file that

will

This RAM controls
RAM (Random-Access Memory).
translation
the
load
Use
printer.
the way in which each character is treated by the line
Use
lowercase letters.
have
that
printers
1line
for
SYS:LP96.RAM
The
letters.
1lowercase
have
SYS:LP64.RAM for printers that do not
command

format

PRINTER n

is:

LOWERCASE RAM dev:<dir>name.typ

TAILORING

THE

SYSTEM

where:

Item

Identifies

The

LOWERCASE

The printer has
the
96-character
set.
If
your
printer
has
the 64-character
set, do not include the
word
LOWERCASE
in

RAM

line printer

the

The

unit number.

command.

type

file

specified

the

command.

dev:<dir>name.typ

The file that contains
RAM.,

Examples of typical RAM commands in

the

configuration

translation
command

£file

are:

Printer

LP2@A,

RAM Command

PRINTER @ RAM SYS:LP64.RAM

LP2@C,

LPZ2@F

LP2@B,

PRINTER @ LOWERCASE RAM SYS:LP96.RAM

LP2@D,

LP2@H

mpStep 71:

Type the RAM command and press the RETURN key.

Enter the appropriate RAM command into the configuration command file.
PRINTER ¢ LOWERCASE RAM SYS:LP96.RAM <RET>
PRINTER 1 RAM SYS:LP64.RAM <RET>

92500
p2600
02700

3.3.6

Defining the

Local

Time Zone

The time zone in which your installation is located can be represented
For example,
east of Greenwich.
west or
hours
of
number
the
as
6;
2zone
1is
Time
Standard
Fastern Standard Time is zone 5; Central
Mountain Standard Time is zone 7; and Pacific Standard Time is zone 8.

To set your local time zone, you can enter the
the configuration command
TIMEZONE

following

command

file:

=12
Zones
where n is a decimal number between -12 and 12 inclusive.
clock time but on opposite sides of the
same
the
represent
12
and
the
in
=zone
time
If you do not specify a
international date line.
2zone will default to zone @,
time
the
file,
command
configuration
signifying

.Step 72:

Greenwich mean

time.

Type the TIMEZONE n command and press the RETURN key.

Enter the TIMEZONE n command into the configuration command file.
22700
p2800

TIMEZONE

<RET>

TAILORING

3.3.7

Directory Parameter

You have

the

option

parameters.

you

THE

SYSTEM

Setting

allowing
decide

users
allow

change

users

their

this,

directory

command

entered into
the
configuration
command
file,
because
the
system
default
1is
to
ENABLE
DIRECTORY-PARAMETER-SETTING.
However, if you
decide not to allow users to change their
directory
parameters,
you
should
enter the command DISABLE DIRECTORY-PARAMETER-SETTING into the
configuration command file.
When this command is given,
it
prevents
the
user
from changing any of his directory parameters unless he has
WHEEL

users

from

mpStep

OPERATOR

73:

Type

prevent

DISABLE

their

DISABLE

RETURN
To

capabilities.

changing

Step

directory

example

disallowing

parameters.

DIRECTORY-PARAMETER-SETTING

and

press

the

parameters,

type

key.

wusers

from

changing

their

directory

DIRECTORY-PARAMETER~SETTING.

32809

DISABLE

DIRECTORY-PARAMETER-SETTING

<RET>

32900
NOTE

If the default is taken, users are allowed
to
change
some
of
their
directory
parameters
with
the
SET
DIRECTORY

3.3.8

Account

You have

the

commands.

Validation

option

requiring

name when they are logging in
valid accounts, you
do
not

configuration

command

ACCOUNT-VALIDATION.

file,

However,

all

users

because
if

you

the

decide

you
must
enter
the
command
DISABLE
configuration command file.
Step 74 is
account validation facility.

.SteE
If

74:

you

are

02900

Type
not

to the system.
have
to
enter

DISABLE

accounts,

valid

not

press

DISABLE

the

account

to require
into
the

validate

ACCOUNT-VALIDATION
an example of
not

type

ACCOUNT-VALIDATION

If you decide
any
command

system default

DISABLE ACCOUNT-VALIDATION and
validating

enter

ENABLE

accounts,

into
wusing

RETURN

the
the

key.

ACCOUNT-VALIDATION.

<RET>

23000

3.3.9
|

Performance

Sections 3.3.9.1
optimization and

Improvements

and 3.3.9.2
working set

(Steps 75
swapping,

and 76) describe
respectively.

full

1latency

3.3.9.1
Full Latency Optimization - When you enter the command ENABLE
FULL-LATENCY-OPTIMIZATION
into
the
configuration
command file, the
number of revolutions needed to read pages off the disk is minimized.

TAILORING

THE

SYSTEM

NOTE

Before you can use this performance feature, you
must
obtain
from your DIGITAL Field Service Representative
the following information about your hardware:
1.

If you have a KL19-E
processor,
revision level 3 or later.

If you
level

board

have board M7772, it
must
E
and CS revision level F;

be
or

must

at
version
you may have

M7786.

If your hardware does
not
take the default:
DISABLE

mp Step 75:

meet
these
requirements,
FULL-LATENCY-OPTIMIZATION.

Type ENABLE FULL-LATENCY-OPTIMIZATION and press

the

RETURN

kez.

your

hardware

meets

the

above

requirements,

type

ENABLE

command
file, the

ENABLE
entire

FULL-LATENCY-OPTIMIZATION.

23000
33100

ENABLE

FULL-LATENCY-OPTIMIZATION

3.3.9.2
Working
Set
WORKING-SET-PRELOADING

<RET>

Swapping - If
you
enter
the
into the configuration command

working set of a process is brought into memory at once
process's
turn
to
run.
Otherwise,
this
action
page-by-page basis.

when it
occurs

is the
on
a

NOTE

You should enable working set swapping
only
if
vyour
system
runs
large
compute-bound
jobs.
However, if
your system runs many interactive jobs or if
you
are
unsure which description better fits your system, take
the default: DISABLE WORKING-SET-PRELOADING.,

.’Steg 76:
|
|

Type ENABLE WORKING-SET-PRELOADING and press the RETURN key.

If
vyour
system
runs
WORKING-SET-PRELOADING.
03100
23200

3.3.18

Sections
controls

large

compute-bound

ENABLE WORKING-SET-PRELOADING

Scheduler

jobs,

type

ENABLE

<RET>

Controls

3.3.10.1 and 3.3.10.2
and class scheduling,

(Steps 77
through
respectively.

8@)

describe

bias

TAILORING

THE

SYSTEM

3.3.19.1
Bias Controls - You have the option
of
deciding
how
your
system's CPU time is to be divided between interactive and batch jobs.
You do this by entering the command
BIAS
n
into
the
configuration
command
file,
where
n is any integer between 1 and 20.
The smaller
the value of n, the larger the percentage of CPU time that is given to
interactive jobs.
1If you do not give this command, a default value of
11 will be taken, which provides a balance
between
good
interactive
response

and

mpStep 77:

reasonable

throughput.

Type the BIAS n command and press the RETURN key.

The example shows how to enter a
which
favors
interactive jobs.
of

for

your

93200
03300

own
BIAS

BIAS n command with
You must determine

a
wvalue
of
6,
the correct value

system.
6

<RET>

3.3.19.2
Class Scheduling - You can use class
scheduling
to
divide
your
system's
CPU
time
among
different
classes
of
Jjobs.
Class
scheduling assigns percentages of CPU time to jobs according to
their
account
or
according to a policy program written especially for your
site.
NOTE

If you do not want to use class scheduling, you do not
have
to
enter
any
command
into
the configuration
command file, because the system default is to DISABLE

|
|

CLASS-SCHEDULING.

If you use either kind of
class
scheduling,
you
can
allocate
any
unused
CPU time (windfall) among active jobs, or withhold it from all
jobs.
The command
for
enabling
class
scheduling
using
a
policy
program
and
allocating
windfall
is
ENABLE
CLASS-SCHEDULING
POLICY-PROGRAM ALLOCATED.
The command for enabling
class
scheduling
using
a
policy
program
and
withholding
windfall
1is
ENABLE
CLASS-SCHEDULING
scheduling
wusing

scheduling

using

giving

one

POLICY-PROGRAM
WITHHELD.
a
policy
program,
you

accounts,

these

two

and

should

Section

3.3.11

class
class

after

commands.

If you do not have a policy program to
your
site, you can still enable class
classes according to the account under

skip

If
you
enable
cannot
also enable

use with
<c¢lass
scheduling
at
scheduling by assigning jobs to
which
each
job
1is
running.

(Refer
to
the
TOPS-2f
System Manager's Guide for information about
associating accounts with particular classes.)
To do
this
you
must
first
enter
commands into the configuration command file, specifying
the percentage of CPU time that is to be given to jobs in each class.

l’»Step 78:

Type the CREATE commands for scheduler classes.

You must enter a CREATE command for each class that your
system
will
use,
with
a
different
percentage
for
each class.
The sum of the
percentages you specify must not add up to more
than
100%,
although
they
may add up to less than 100%.
If they add up to less than 100%,
the percentage of CPU time that is not assigned becomes
part
of
the
system's windfall.
Press the RETURN key after each CREATE command.

TAILORING

THE

SYSTEM

The commands shown are an example of dividing up 75% of
the
system's
CPU time among three classes of jobs.
For example, the command CREATE
1 .20 specifies that jobs running under accounts in class 1 are to
be
given
a
total of 20% of your system's CPU time.
You must supply the
correct class numbers and percentages for your own system.
23300
23400
93500

CREATE
CREATE
CREATE

1
2
3

.20
.40
.15

03600

Step 79:

Type the BATCH-CLASS n command and
press
the
RETURN
key.
Then
"assign
a
percentage
to
this
class with the CREATE
command
.

Batch jobs can be put into a special class of their own
by
including
the
BATCH-CLASS
n
command,
where
n is the number of the class you
choose for batch jobs.
If you do not
enter
a
BATCH-CLASS
command,
batch
jobs
are given CPU time according to the class associated with
the account of the job's owner at the time of submission.
The example
creates
a
class
for
batch jobs and then assigns 25% of CPU time to
this class with the CREATE command.
You must enter commands that
are
appropriate

for

your

system.

BATCH-CLASS 4 <RET>
CREATE 4 .25 <RET>

P3600
83700

Step

23800

84:

nge ENABLE CLASS-SCHEDULING ACCOUNTS

the

RETURN

key.

ALLOCATED

and

press

Now you must enter the command that
enables
class
scheduling
using
accounts.,
You must also decide whether to allocate any windfall CPU
time to the jobs that are running or to withhold this
windfall.
The
It is recommended that you
is ALLOCATED.
command
this
for
default
take

this

g3800

default.

ENABLE CLASS-SCHEDULING ACCOUNTS ALLOCATED <RET>

23900
CAUTION

Do not enter the above
command
(Step
88)
into
the
configuration
command file until you have entered the
commands shown in Steps 78
and
709.
If
you
enable
class
schedul ing
scheduling will not

3.3.11

before
creating
function properly.

classes,

class

File Archiving and Migration Parameters

Sections 3.3.11.1 and 3.3.11.2 (Steps 81 and 82) describe tape recycle
periods for use with the file archiving and migration features.

feature
a
provides
Period - TOPS-2@¢
Archive Tape Recycle
3.3.11.1
storage of selected files on magnetic tape for
off-line
allows
that
long periods of time.
You can specify for how long
these
files
are
the configuration command file
into
command
a
inserting
by
saved

TAILORING

stating, in days, the
save
archival
files
command,

recycle period
on
tape
for

1825

default

.’.Steg

81:

value

Type

3650

command

(ten

years)

tapes.
For
example,
vyears, you would enter
(because
5
years
x

you
the

will

not

configuration

to
the
365

insert
command

an
file,

taken.

the ARCHIVE-TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD n command

RETURN

and

press

the

key.

The example
shows
how
to
command
with
a
wvalue
of
suitable value of n for your
23900
24000

1825

days).

ARCHIVE-TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD

SYSTEM

of the
five

ARCHIVE-TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD

days/year
a

THE

enter

an
ARCHIVE-TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD
1825
(five years).
You must determine
own system.

ARCHIVE-TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD

1825

<RET>

3.3.11.2
Migration Tape Recycle Period - TOPS-20 provides
a
feature
that
allows automatic off-line storage of old or little-used files on
magnetic tape for short periods of time.
You can specify for how long
these
files
are
saved by inserting a command into the configuration
command

file

example,

stating,

save

days,

migrated

the

files

recycle

period

for

tape

three

the

tapes.

months,

For

you

would

enter the command TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD 90 (because
3
months
with
30
days/month
=
9@
days).
If you do not insert a TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD
command in the configuration command file, a default value of 188 (six
months) will be taken.

mpStep 82:

Type the TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD n command and press the

RETURN

key.

The example shows how to enter a TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD n command with
value
of 90 (three months).
You must determine a suitable value of
for your own systenm.
04000
04100

3.3.12

Tape

TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD

Drive

Sections 3.3.12.1
drive
allocation
error conditions.

a
n

<RET>

Allocation
and 3.3.12.2 (Steps
into
effect,
and

83 and 84)
specifying

describe putting tape
a response to certain

3.3.12.1
Enabling Tape Drive Allocation - TOPS-28
provides
for
the
automatic assignment of tape drives to users who wish to read or write
magnetic tapes.
In order to use this feature, which also allows
your
system
to
read
must
insert
the

and

write the labels of standard labeled
command
ENABLE
TAPE-DRIVE-ALLOCATION

configuration
command
file.
If
users must assign tape drives with
their labeled tapes will be treated

tapes,

into

you do not give this command,
the
TOPS-2¢
ASSIGN
command
as unlabeled tapes.

you

the
your
and

TAILORING

mp Step 83:

Type

THE

SYSTEM

ENABLE TAPE-DRIVE-ALLOCATION and press the RETURN key.

To allow labeled tape processing and the automatic assignment of

drives,

type

24100

ENABLE

TAPE-DRIVE-ALLOCATION.

ENABLE

TAPE-DRIVE-ALLOCATION

tape

<RET>

04200

3.3.12.2
Treatment of Unrecognized Tapes - If you enabled tape
drive
allocation
in
the
previous
step,
you
must decide what action the
system should take if
a
1labeled
tape
is
mounted
improperly
(for
example,
the user specifies the wrong label type or density).
If you
want the system to unload the tape so that it cannot
be
accidentally
erased,
you
must
insert
the command TAPE-RECOGNITION-ERRORS UNLOAD
into the configuration command file.
If you do not give this command,
the
system
will
treat improperly mounted labeled tapes as unlabeled
tapes and will continue processing them.
That is, the system
default
is

TAPE-RECOGNITION-ERRORS

.’»Steg 84:
To

force

mounted,

REGARD-AS-UNLABELED.

Type TAPE-RECOGNITION-ERRORS UNLOAD

key.

the automatic unloading of

type

04200

TAPE-RECOGNITION-ERRORS

any

and

tapes

UNLOAD.

press

that

are

the

RETURN

improperly

UNLOAD <RET>

24300

3.3.13

Accounting

Shift

Changes

The accounting facility allows you to provide varied billing rates for
system
use at different times.
You do this by entering commands into
the configuration command file specifying the time
of
day
for
each
rate
change.
You
should
give
one
command for each time the rate
changes.
Use days of the week or the keywords WEEKDAYS, WEEKENDS, and
ALL,
and
times
in
either
24-hour
or AM/PM format.
(Refer to the
TOPS-20
System
Manager's
Guide
for
detailed
information
about
accounting

.’Eflfip'85:

shift

changes.)

Type the CHANGE commands for accounting shift changes.

CHANGE commands are entered into the
configuration
command
file
to
provide special rates for evenings and weekends.
Press the RETURN key
after entering each command.
provide the correct days and
24300
B4400
24500
24600

CHANGE
CHANGE
CHANGE

This
times

9:00 WEEKDAYS
17:00 WEEKDAYS
@:00 SATURDAY

1is
only
an
example.
for your own system.

You

NOTE

You do not have to
enter
CHANGE
commands
into
the
configuration
command
file.
If you do not enter any
CHANGE commands, the accounting shift
change
feature
of system accounting is not used.

3-17

must

TAILORING

3.3.14

Assigning

MSCP-served

THE

Disk

SYSTEM

Drives

MSCP (Mass Storage Communication Protocol)
is responsible for granting
access
to
MASSBUS
disks
across the CI (Computer Interconnect).
To
have MSCP grant access to disks across the CI, use the ALLOW
command,
in the following format, in the configuration command file:
ALLOW

drive-type

serial-number

where:

drive-type

RP@4,

serial-number
To

determine

the

CONFIGURATION.

serial

disk
(See

1
T

Enter
press

86:

Define

RPP7,

number

drive's
the

Manual for information
1s 'hot ALLOWed.'

Step

RPO6,

serial

TOPS-2§

RP2J
the

disk

number,

Operator's

about

this

command.)

MSCP-served

disk

drives.

the ALLOW command
the RETURN key.

for each disk drive
(Determine the disk

drive

use

the

Command

The

OPR

04600
04700

ALLOW
ALLOW

RP@6
RP20

1243
3327

command

Language

default

for

SHOW

Reference

all

disks

to be served by
MSCP
and
drive's serial number with

the OPR command SHOW CONFIGURATION.)
The
commands
examples.
You must determine the correct definitions

shown
are
only
for your system.

04800

3.3.15
You
the

Specifying

Daylight

Savings

Time

can specify one of three daylight savings time
configuration command file.
The three options

(DST)
are:

options

1in

AUTOMATIC (change at the prescribed time; that is, set DST to
automatically
go
on
the
last
Sunday
in
April
and
to
automatically go off the last Sunday in October)

OFF

(never

DST conversions)

(always

DST conversions)

The most convenient option is
option is best for your site.

Step 87:

AUTOMATIC,

but

you must

determine

which

Type the DAYLIGHT n command and press the RETURN key.

To specify the DST option for your system, type DAYLIGHT
followed
by
the appropriate argument.
The following is only an example.
You must
enter the correct definition for your system.
04800
24900

DAYLIGHT

<RET>

TAILORING

3.3.16

THE

SYSTEM

Specifying Remote Line Conditions

You can specify whether or not a remote line will be hung up after the
issued on logged-out or logged-in terminal jobs.
is
LOGOUT command
Setting these parameters can be especially useful for dial-up lines or
contention

resource

for

devices such as terminal concentrators.

specify whether a remote line will be hung-up, you must enter either
an ENABLE or DISABLE command in the configuration command file.
Type

mp Step 88:

ENABLE

the

HANGUP -IF-LOGGED-IN

HANGUP-IF-LOGGED-OUT commands.

ENABLE

and

To enable the remote line to be disconnected after a logout command is
issued on logged-out or logged-in terminal jobs, type the following
two commands into the configuration command file.

key after

each

- ENABLE
ENABLE

4909
25000

Press

the

RETURN

command.

HANGUP-IF-LOGGED-IN <RET>
HANGUP-IF-LOGGED-OUT <RET>

35100

3.3,17

Controlling System Message Levels

such as
events,
You have the option of notifying users of certain
following two commands allow you to control
The
resource problems.
what class of messages users will

sENABLE

l DISABLE
will

inform
sENABLE

lDISABLE
will

inform

.’.Step 89:

receive.

L~
SYSTEM-MESSAGE~LEVE

(or not inform)

users about resource problems,

SYSTEM-MESSAGE-LEVEL-1

(or not inform)

users of operational type messages.

Type the ENABLE SYSTEM-MESSAGE-LEVEL-n

commands

system

messages,

the RETURN key.

To enable users to receive both types of
ENABLE SYSTEM-MESSAGE-LEVEL-n commands.

#5100
85200

and

type

press

the

ENABLE SYSTEM-MESSAGE-LEVEL-# <RET>
ENABLE SYSTEM-MESSAGE-LEVEL-1 <RET>

#5300

3.3.18

Network Information

into your
(Steps 9¢ and 91)
following command 1lines
Enter the
1in order to identify your system and to
file
configuration command
turn off LAT

(Local Area Transport)

terminal servers.

TAILORING

mp Step 9¢0:
|
|
|
|

Type

NODE

nodename

THE

SYSTEM

nodenumber

and

press

the

RETURN

key.

Use the NODE command to
define
your
system's
node
name
and
node
number.
By
providing
this information in the configuration command
file, you enable several processes to work properly.
In the
example,
the node name is DISNEY and the node number is 8.164.

I
I
I

25300
95400

» Step

91:

|
[
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
I
|
|
|
|
|
I
I
|

the

Type

NODE

Type

DISNEY

LAT-STATE

#5400
25500

OFF

LAT-STATE

8.164

OFF

<RET>

and

command
OFF

press

you

the
are

RETURN
not

using

information
on
installing
LAT
terminal
installation guide for any LAT terminal servers
Update

Perform

THE

Steps

CONFIGURATION

and

servers.

COMMAND

save

ESCape

key.

servers,
see
that you have.

the

Installations

Proceed to Appendix A,
Section
A.2.5,
continue your update installation.

SAVING

terminal

<RET>

For

3.4

key.

and

Step

43,

FILE

read

the

configuration

command

file.

mp Step

92:

Press

the

Type

EU and

press

the

RETURN

key.

When you have finished creating the configuration command file,
press
I
ESCape key to end insert mode.
The system prints the EDIT prompt
the
I
Then type EU and press the RETURN key to
save
the
file.
The
I(*).
system
prints
the
file name and generation number, then the ENABLEAd
I
prompt ($).
|

#5500
*EU

<RET>

[PS:<SYSTEM>6-1-CONFIG.CMD.
1]

.’.Step 93:

Enter TYPE PS:<SYSTEM>6-1-CONFIG.CMD and

press

the

RETURN

key.
To be sure
command.

(see

that the file is in the
proper
directory,
use
the
TYPE
The system prints the contents of the file on your terminal

Figure

Error:

3-1).

The

file

If the system cannot
give
the
following

Figure

3-1

find

file or prints the wrong file,
command
to
place
the
file in

COPY

only an

example.

the

PS:<SYSTEM>:

$COPY 6-1-CONFIG.CMD PS:<SYSTEM>6-1-CONFIG.CMD <RET>
(Refer
change

to the TOPS-2¢
the file.)

EDIT

Reference

Manual

you

want

TAILORING

THE

SYSTEM

STYPE PS:<SYSTEM>6-1-CONFIG.CMD <RET>
! Terminal Speeds

Line 1 has input=9600¢ and output=9600

Lines

2 to 20 have

Lines

23 to 40 are shut off

TERMINAL

SPEED

2-20 SPEED

TERMINAL

23-40

TERMINAL

Line

9600

input and output=2400

2400

SPEED

21 and 22 are dialup lines
REMOTE

SPEED

300

TERMINAL 22
DEFINE NEW:
DEFINE OLD:

REMOTE AUTO
PS:<NEW>,SYS:
PS5:<OLD>,SY¥S:

DEFINE

HLP:

SY¥S:

DEFINE

SERR:

DEFINE

DMP:

PS:<SYSTEM-ERROR>
PS:<directory>

DEFINE
DEFINE

POBOX: PS:
EDITOR: SYS:TV.EXE

MAGTAPE

MAGTAPE
MAGTAPE
MAGTAPE
MAGTAPE

1
2
3
4

20061
2¢02
2003
1509

TUA45
TU77
TU71
TU70
TU72

PRINTER @ LOWERCASE VFU SYS:NORMAL.VFU
PRINTER 1 VFU SYS:NORMAL.VFU
PRINTER ¢ LOWERCASE RAM SYS:LP96.RAM
PRINTER 1 RAM SYS:LP64.RAM
TIMEZONE

DISABLE

DIRECTORY-PARAMETER-SETTING

DISABLE ACCOUNT-VALIDATION
ENABLE FULL-LATENCY-OPTIMIZATION
ENABLE WORKING-SET-PRELOADING
BIAS 6
CREATE 1 .20
CREATE 2 .49
CREATE 3 .15
BATCH--CLASS 4
CREATE 4 .25

ENABLE CLASS—-SCHEDULING ACCOUNTS ALLOCATED
ARCHIVE-TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD 1825
TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD 90
ENABLE TAPE-DRIVE-ALLOCATION
TAPE-RECOGNITION-ERRORS UNLOAD
CHANGE 9:00 WEEKDAYS
CHANGE 17:00 WEEKDAYS
CHANGE @:00 SATURDAY
ALLOW RP@6 1243
ALLOW RP2@ 3327
ON

DAYLIGHT

ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE

HANGUP-IF-LOGGED-IN
HANGUP-IF-LOGGED-OUT
SYSTEM-MESSAGE-LEVEL-0

ENABLE SYSTEM-MESSAGE-LEVEL-1
NODE DISNEY 8.164
LAT-STATE

OFF

Figure 3-1:

The 6-1-CONFIG.CMD File

TAILORING

3.5

CHANGING THE

OPERATOR'S

You may wish
to
change
publicized
"DEC-20"
to

THE

SYSTEM

PASSWORD AND

USER GROUP

the
operator's
password
from
the
a
39-alphanumeric-character
phrase

choosing.
(The password can include a hyphen.)
Be sure
the
password
or
you will have to reinstall the system

think

|
|

the

Also, in
Package

through

particular

password

that

you

widely
of your

to
remember
if you cannot

typed.

order for the operator to run
the
User
Environmental
Test
(UETP),
he
must belong to the correct user group.
Steps 94

describe how to

change

the

operator's

password

and

user

group.

mpStep 94:
|

Use

the

Type BUILD PS:<OPERATOR> and press the RETURN key.
BUILD command

PS: <OPERATOR>.

prompt

The

change

system

the

characteristics of

prints

[01d],

and

then

the

directory

the

subcommand

$S$.

$SBUILD PS:<OPERATOR>
[01d]

<RET>

$$
.’Efiep

95:

Type

PASSWORD your-password

To insert the operator's new password,
The system again prints the subcommand

SSPASSWORD your-password

.}snep 96:
The
The

Type

operator

system

USER-OF-GROUP

must

again

the

press

use

the

RETURN

key.

subcommand

PASSWORD.

prompt.

<RET>

10¢ and press the RETURN key.

member

prints

and

user

subcommand

group

104

order

run

UETP.

prompt.

$SUSER-OF-GROUP 1088 <RET>
Error:

you

can

‘Step 97:

see

ignore

the

Type

message

this

correct

user

IPCF and press

The operator must
have
capabilities
in
order
subcommand prompt.

similar

message.

group.

the

to:

The

%Group

operator

Continue

already

with

Step

return

Press
to

IPCF
(InterProcess
to
run
UETP.
The

$$ <RET>
S

command

you

member

97.

Communication
Facility)
system again prints the

the RETURN key.

TOPS-20

RETURN key.

$SIPCF <RET>
$$
.}Step 98:

exists,

already

level,

press

the

RETURN

key.

TAILORING THE

3.6

SYSTEM

CREATING THE DIRECTORY PS:<REMARKS>

sent by
The system uses the directory PS:<REMARKS> to store messages
this directory avoids constant
Creating
the operator.
users to
With
interruption to the operator from users issuing PLEASE requests.

this

directory the operator can read the messages at a specified time

108.
and
99
Steps
Create the directory by performing
each day.
the TOPS-2@ Operator's Guide for additional information on
to
(Refer
creating directories.)

Type BUILD PS:<REMARKS> and press the RETURN key.

.’.Step 99:

Use the BUILD command to create the directory PS:<REMARKS>.
SBUILD PS:<REMARKS>

<RET>

[New]

Press the RETURN key.

.’ Step l@@:

Upon completion of the above step, the system
RETURN

the

Press

key

create

prints

directory

[New]

with

$s.

and

default

characteristics.

$$
$

3.7

<RET>

CREATING THE LPFORM.INI FILE

receives
LPTSPL
If you create the LPFORM.INI file, then each time
request for the line printer, the system does the following:

wuser

who

Prints up to five pages containing the name of the file

that

prints
After all the information in that file is printed, it
up to five pages containing the user's name again (TRAILER).

Prints up to five pages containing the name of the

requested

being

the line

printed

printer

(BANNER).

(HEADER).

|is
If this file is omitted, each time a request for the line printer
LPTSPL will use the system default, which is two pages each
received,
for the banner, header, and trailer.

Perform Steps 101 through 104 to create the LPFORM.INI file.
l’»Stgp 191:

Type CONNECT PS:<SUBSYS> and press the RETURN key.

Use the
The LPFORM.INI file must reside in the directory PS:<SUBSYS>.
CONNECT command tc be sure you are using the correct directory.
SCONNECT PS:<SUBSYS>
$

<RET>

TAILORING

M) Step 1#2:
Use

your

This

SYSTEM

Type CREATE LPFORM.INI and press the RETURN key.
system's

example

LPFORM.INI

prints

THE

text

editing

program

the

editing

program

EDIT.

uses

create

INPUT:

the

SCREATE LPFORM.INI

INPUT:

file.

The

PS:<SUBSYS>LPFORM.INI

create

system

and

the

LPFORM.INI

use

EDIT,

proceeds

the

line

into

number

type

edit

file.

CREATE

mode

and

091040.

<RET>

PS:<SUBSYS)>LPFORM.INI.1

02100

mp Step 103:

Enter the printer parameters.

Type the printer parameters that
are
Press
the
RETURN
key
after
each
parameters

for

parameters in
determine the
g0100
20200
0B300

both

normal

the example
appropriate

and

appropriate
parameter.

narrow

for
The

forms.

are for explanatory
parameters for your

your
system.
example
shows

Remember

purposes
system.

that

only.

<RET>
NARROW/BANNER: 2/HEADER:2/TRAILER: 2/WIDTH: 72

the

You must

NORMAL/BANNER:
2/HEADER: 2/TRAILER:2

<RET>

The parameters shown cause pages containing the user's
name
and
the
file
name
to be printed twice on both normal and narrow forms before
the actual data is printed.
Also, after all the data is printed,
the
system
prints two pages containing the user's name on both normal and
narrow

forms.

maximum

(Refer
all

the

leave

parameter

characters
TOPS-20

LPFORM.INI

l}fflep 194:
ESCape
RETURN

The

WIDTH:72

can be

Operator's

mode

Guide

for

complete

e300
*EU

number,

system

that

narrow

description

and

save

the

file

without

line

then

the

TOPS-2@

command

numbers,
Type
the

EU and
file

press
press
name

prompt.

<RET>

[PS:<SUBSYS>LPFORM,INI.1]

—

S——

Perform Steps 105 through Step 114
only
if
you
are
using
an
RP@7
disk
pack for your system structure.
Otherwise, continue with Step 115 in Chapter 4.

om—

—

NOTE

TCP/IP

Installations

"
——
T
—

forms.
of

Type EU and press the RETURN key.

key.
The system prints the EDIT prompt.
key to save the file.
The system
prints

generation

the

horizontally on

parameters.)

Press the ESCape key.
edit

informs

printed

If you are installing TCP/IP-20 and are using an
RP@7
disk pack for your system structure, perform Steps 105
through
114,
Otherwise,
proceed
to
Appendix
c,
Section C.3, Step 2.

the
the
and

TAILORING THE

3.8

SYSTEM

BUILDING A FRONT-END FILE STRUCTURE

Steps 185 through 114 describe how to build an RP@4 or RP@6

structure

for the front-end file system when you are using an RP@7 disk pack for
file system.

the TOPS-20

q}Step 195:

Type RUN CHECKD and press the RETURN key.

To run CHECKD to create a structure for your

type RUN CHECKD.

front-end

The system prints the prompt CHECKD>.

file

system,

$RUN CHECKD <RET>
CHECKD>

.’Enep 196:

Type CREATE FESYS and press the RETURN key.

inform the system that you are
Use the CHECKD command CREATE to
The structure name can consist of 1 to 6
creating a structure.
(Refer to the TOPS-20¢ System Manager's Guide
alphanumeric characters.
The example uses FESYS. After
)
structures.
naming
on
information
for
you enter the structure name, the system prints "Enter alias:."
CHECKD>CREATE FESYS
Enter alias:

.)Step 187:

<RET>

Type FESYS and press the RETURN key.

Now inform the system of the alias name of the structure. The example
The system then prints "How many units in this
FESYS.
uses
structure:."

Enter alias: FESYS <RET>
How many units in this structure:

.}Steg 1¢8:

Type 1 and press the RETURN key.

Type
The front-end file system can only reside on a single structure.
The system prints "DECIMAL
1 unit in the structure.
indicate
1 to
Channel, Controller, and Unit numbers for logical unit @:."
How many units

in this structure:

<RET>

DECIMAL Channel, Controller, and Unit numbers for logical unit #:
mpsStep 109:

Type 1,-1,0 and press the RETURN key.

The front-end file system must reside on either an RP@4 or RPO6 disk
If you
drive that is connected to both the KL1# and PDPll front end.
The
key.
RETURN
the
press
and
(?)
mark
question
a
type
are not sure,
system prints the information needed to make the decision. The
example uses channel 1, controller -1 (which is the default), and unit
After you type this information, the system prints "Number of
a.
pages to allocate

for swapping?."

DECIMAL Channel, Controller, and Unit numbers for logical unit @:
1,-1,0

<RET>

Number of pages to allocate for swapping?

TAILORING

I)Enep 110:

THE

SYSTEM

nge the number of pages to allocate for swapping and press

the

RETURN

key.

If you plan to use this structure
a decimal number between 2000 and

as a secondary system structure, use
40,000.
Otherwise, type # and press
the RETURN key.
The system prints "Number of pages
to
allocate
for
the
Front
End
File System?."
The example assumes you will be using
this structure as a secondary structure.
Number

pages

allocate

for

swapping?

Number

7835

pages

allocate

for

the

End

.’.Step 111:

Type

the number of pages to allocate

system

allocate

system,

use

Number

950

|’.Step 112:

number

pages.

system

allocate

reserve
prints

for

for the

front-end

file

key.

the

for

"Owner

Front

the

front-end

file

name?."

End

File

System?

name?

Type

for

the owner's name

name?

this

113:

startup?."

The

OPERATOR

system

and press the RETURN key.

CHECKD>

this

example

uses

the

name

OPERATOR.

<RET>

structure

Type NO and press

To inform the
startup, type

pages

The

RETURN

owner's name of the structure.
The owner's name can be from
alphanumeric characters. The system prints "Is this a system

Owner

|
|

the
950

the

<RET>
File System?

the
12

structure

»Step

press

<RET>

Owner

Enter

and

Front

for

startup?

the RETURN key.

system that this structure will not be
used
NO.
The system prints the CHECKD prompt.
a

system

structure

for

startup? NO

system

<RET>

mp Step 114:
Type

EXIT

command

Type EXIT and press the RETURN key.
to

end

prompt

the

CHECKD

program.

The

system

prints

($).

CHECKD>EXIT

the

<RET>

$
NOTE

When performing the steps in Chapter
install the front-end file system on

have

just

you

Section

are

be
sure
structure

created.

TCP/IP

4,
the

installing
C.3,

Step

Installations

TCP/IP-20,
2.

you
you

proceed

Appendix

TOPS-20

CHAPTER

CREATING THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM

The steps in this chapter restore the front-end file system when you
They also restore
it or change the front-end hardware.
reinitialize
the front-end software if the front-end file system on disk 1is

destroyed.

The steps in this chapter copy the front-end software from the floppy
They
disks to the front-end file space on the public structure.
involve the

following

front-end programs:

MOU

Adds a device to the list of front—-end devices.

UFD

Creates a directory in

PIP

Copies files from the floppy disk to the public structure.

RED

Changes the definition of the front-end

SAV

Saves the

public

structure.

the

space

file

front-end

1logical

from the floppy disk to the public structure.

the

S5Y#:

name

front-end monitor.

Initializes

INI

the

front-end

system

file

the

public

structure.

Logically dismounts the floppy disks from the disk drives.

DMO

TCP/IP Installations

If you are installing

Steps
the

4.1

|
|

you

must

complete

front—-end

file system.

HALTING THE TOPS-20 MONITOR

You need to halt the TOPS-20 monitor (Steps 115
you can start the front—end monitor.

.’.Step 115:
I
I
I
|
I

TCP/IP-28,

1 through 23 in Appendix C before you can create

through

118)

before

Type “ECEASE NOW and press the RETURN key.

Before copying the front-end software from the floppy disks, stop

system to avoid damaging the file system.
S“ECEASE NOW <RET>

KL2182 Will be shut down

[Confirm]

<RET>

IMMEDIATELY

the

CREATING

[Timesharing

Shutdown

.’Efiep
Be

116:

sure

.’Step

- WAIT

ENTERING

FOR

THE

MESSAGE

COMMANDS

sure

System

that

the

Floppy

correct
is

System
Floppy
B
Step 7 in Chapter 2

117:

FILE

SYSTEM

"Shutdown

complete"

PARSER

complete

Make

that

and
that
(Refer to

FRONT-END

over]

OPERATOR

BEFORE

THE

Type

floppy

mounted

disks

the

are

left

mounted.

drive

1is mounted in the right
if you have trouble.)

drive

(drive

1).

<CTRL/\>.

At the console terminal,
Command
Parser.
When
system prints the prompt

type <CTRL/\>
to
return
you
are at Command Parser
PAR>.

to
the
command

front-end
level, the

.}Step
To

118:

stop

Type

the

SHUTDOWN and press

TOPS-20

PAR>SHUTDOWN

monitor,

type

the
the

RETURN

key.

SHUTDOWN command.

<RET>

**HALTED**

$DECSYSTEM-20
Error:

you

4.2

|
|

The

system
not,

did

not

Set

the

SHUTDOWN and

error

message

stop

must
type

"$DECSYSTEM-20

and

give

the

not

running."

ABORT command.

If
Go

it
back

FRONT-END MONITOR

TOPS-20

monitor

described

Set the switch register to 900083

front-end

printed,

117.

THE

the

command.

TOPS-2f monitor is shutdown, you can
restart
(Steps 119 and 12@).
This entire procedure is

‘Step 119:
rest

Step

RESTARTING

Once the
monitor

the

does

running

mistype

reissue

not

switch

000003

Section

the
front-end
invalid if you
4.1.

(octal).
(switches

and

up,

the

down).

mp Step 128:

Hold ENABLE and press the SWITCH REGISTER button.

Hold ENABLE
and
press
the
SWITCH
REGISTER
button
to
start
the
front-end
monitor from drive @#.
The system will print a few lines of
information.
After
the
system
prints
[DXl: mounted]
proceed
to
Section 4.3.

CREATING THE FRONT;END FILE SYSTEM
RSX-2@F VB15-21 12:00 13-NOV-84
[SY#:

[DX@:
[DX1:

redirected to DX@:]

mounted]
mounted]

If you left the switch register set to g000@7, the system
starts the KL 1Initialization routine. 1In this case, the

Error:

printout looks like this:

RSX-2@F VB15-21 12:00 13-NOV-84
[SY@:

[DX@:
[DX1:

redirected TO DX@:]

mounted]
mounted]

KLI -- VERSION VB15-15 RUNNING

KLI -- ENTER DIALOG

[NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]?

KLI>

Set the switch register to 900003 and press the

ENABLE

and

the

system

may

SWITCH REGISTER buttons again.

If you set the switch register to

000003,

print:

11-HALT
TO4
or

*#%*This VOLUME DOES NOT CONTAIN A HARDWARE-BOOTABLE SYSTEM**
Set the switch register correctly and press the

SWITCH REGISTER buttons again.

4.3

ENABLE

and

COPYING FILES FROM FLOPPY DISK TO RP@4 OR RP@6

the
Use the following procedures (Steps 120 through 153) to copy
and
end
front
the
to
commands
typing
are
you
that
Remember
files.
that you must wait for a prompt before typing the answer. There is no

type-ahead feature except when you want to type <CTRL/\>. You can
type <CTRL/U> to erase an entire line or press the DELETE key to erase
a single character per keystroke.

the
Many of the steps in this chapter and in Chapter 5 assume that than
disk pack is mounted on drive ¢. To use a dual-port drive other
drive #, make the following changes:

to be typed, type the number

Where a step calls for DB@:

If the disk is mounted on a drive other than drive @,
pressing ENABLE and DISK in Step 164 will not work. Instead,
set the front-end switch register switches 7 and # in the up
Set switches 1@, 9, and 8 to the binary number of
position.
For example, for drive 1, set switch 8 up;
used.
the drive
for drive 2, set switch 9 up; for drive 3, set switches 9 and
8 up. After this has been completed, press the ENABLE and

For example, DBl:, DB2:, etc.
the actual drive used.
will reflect this change.
system
the
by
printed
Messages

SWITCH REGISTER buttons.

CREATING

m) Step 121:

FRONT-END

FILE

SYSTEM

Type <CTRL/\>.

To start the
takes
about

disks.
You
the
prompt
central

THE

front-end
10

are at
PAR%.

processor

[DX1:

Command

seconds

Parser,

1load

the

type

<CTRL/\>.

Command

Parser

Command Parser command
The percent sign (%)
is

not

level
after

The

from

the

system
floppy

when the system prints
PAR indicates that the

running.

mounted]

<CTRL/\>
PAR%

mp Step 122:

STOP.

The central processor (as opposed to the front-end processor) must
be
halted
before you proceed to the next step.
If the central processor
is not halted,
the
front-end
monitor
will
not
be
saved
in
the
front-end
file
system in a usable state.
When the central processor
is stopped, the system prints a percent sign (%) following the Command
Parser

prompt.

command

and

mp Step 123:

type

prints

before

Type RUN INI and

angle

bracket

(>)

PAR%RUN

INI

you

the

SHUTDOWN

press the RETURN key.

To start the INITIALIZE program, type RUN INI.

program
is
ready
for
prints the prompt INI>.

give

continuing.

type

commands

When

(after

the

INITIALIZE

few seconds),

<RET>

INI>

l’»Step 124:

Type DB@:

perform
To

initialize

the

about

reprint

the

prompt.

Error:

front-end

DBO:.

INI>DB@:

and press the RETURN key.

file

seconds,

Proceed

system
the

you

type

the

again

wrong

121.

press the front-end
back to Step 1240.

HALT

start

Command

prints

Type
the

public

the

structure,

finishes.

seconds

does

and
type
not

step.

name

you

switch

get

still get
and

wait

error

message,

error message,

one

minute.

When

the

<CTRL/\>.

front-end

Parser

the

device

Step

the

program

<RET>

start

125:

INI

directly

.’»Step

Wait

step.

1is

prompt

Command

ready

for

you

Parser,
to

type

<CTRL/\>.

commands

(about

PARS.

<CTRL/\>
PARS%

NOTE

Nothing

happens

until

you

type

<CTRL/\>.

seconds) ,

CREATING THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM

mpStep 126:

Type RUN MOU and press the RETURN key.

To start the MOUNT program again, type RUN MOU.
command

level,

the system prints MOU>.

PAR%RUN MOU

When you are at MOUNT

<RET>

MOU>

If you make a typing error, reissue the command.

Error:
mpStep 127:

Type DB@:

and press the RETURN key.

To allow the front end to use its reserved area on the dual-port disk
(the one with the channel selector set to A/B), type DB@:. When the
mount operation is complete, the system prints a message and the
prompt

MOU>.

MOU>DB@:

<RET)>

MOU -- MOUNT COMPLETE
MOU>

If you mistype DB@:, the mount operation may fail.

Error:

this

happens and the system reprints the prompt MOU>, reissue the
command.

mpstep 128:

Otherwise, go back to Step 125.

Type <CTRL/Z> and <CTRL/\>.

To terminate the MOUNT program and start the front-end Command Parser,

<CTRL/Z> followed by <CTRL/\>.

type

After about 19 seconds, when the

system is at Command Parser command level, it prints the prompt PAR%.
2
MOU>"
<CTRL/\>
PAR%

mpStep 129:

Type RUN UFD and press the RETURN key.

The system loads the program
To run the UFD program, type RUN UFD.
After a few seconds, UFD is ready
from the floppy disk and starts it.
for you to type commands and prints the prompt UFD>.
PAR%RUN

UFD

<RET>

UFD>

Error:

|..Step 13¢9:

If you make a typing error, reissue the command.

Type DB@:[5,5] and press the RETURN key.
and perform

the

Wait

seconds

step.

To create the directory (in the front-end reserved space on the public
that contains the front-end file system, type DB®@:[5,5].
structure)
Wait
When the UFD program finishes, it does not reprint the prompt.
1¢ seconds and then proceed directly to the next step.
UFD>DB@: [5,5]

<RET>

CREATING

Error:

the

system

UFD

Error:

-~-

probably

you

ran

the

did
MOU

system

UFD

FRONT-END

FILE

SYSTEM

prints:

FAILED

you

the

THE

not

CREATE

give

program.

DIRECTORY

the
Go

correct
back

command
Step

the

last

time

122.

prints:

DIRECTORY

ALREADY

EXISTS

and you have run the INI
front-end file system has

pack

will
beginning

mpStep 131:

program
on
the
disk,
then
been corrupted and the entire
have
to
be
reformatted
and
rebuilt
from
of the installation.

the
disk

the

Type <CTRL/\>.

load the front-end
<CTRL/\>.
After
10
and the system prints

Command
Parser
from
the
seconds, the Command Parser
the prompt PARS%.

floppy

disk,

type

command

level

<CTRL/\>
PAR%
NOTE

Nothing

mp Step 132:
To

load

PIP.
system

happens

until

you

type

<CTRL/\>.

Type RUN PIP and press the RETURN key.,

the

PIP

program

from

After

seconds,

prints

the

prompt

PARSRUN

PIP

<RET>

you

make

the

PIP

floppy

disk

ready

for

and

you

start

type

PIP>.

it,
type
commands.

RUN

The

PIP>
Error:

’Step 133:

Type

copy

(both

the

structure,

and

newest

drive

the

and

type

DELETE

typing

error,

reissue

the

DB@:*.*; *=DX@:*.*;*,DX1:*,*;*

kex.
To

version

drive

all

the

and

files

front-end

help

type

this

line

and

press

from

file

DB@:*.*;*=DX@:
*;* DXl:* ,*%;*,
*

key

command.

the

system

(You

others

the

RETURN

floppy

the

disks

public

can

use

this

chapter.)

You will hear clicking as the system accesses the floppy disks.
After
about
1¢#
minutes, the transfer is complete and the system prints the

prompt

PIP>,

PIP
. *;
>DB
*=DX@:* ,*;*
@:*
DX1:* ,*;* <RET>
PIP>

Error:

you

make

typing

error,

reissue

the

command.

CREATING

mp Step 134:

THE

FRONT-END

FILE

SYSTEM

Type <CTRL/Z> and <CTRL/\>.

To end PIP and start
the
front-end
Command
Parser,
followed by <CTRL/\>.
After 10 seconds, the system is
commands and prints the prompt PAR%.

type
ready

<CTRL/Z>
to accept

PIP>"Z
<CTRL/\>
PAR%

Error:

»Step

135:

you make

Type

typing

error,

RUN RED and press

the

reissue

the

command.

RETURN key.

To load and start the REDIRECT program from floppy disk, type RUN RED.
After
the
REDIRECT
program
is ready to accept commands (about five
seconds), the system prints the REDIRECT prompt RED>.
PAR%RUN

RED

<RET>

RED>

Error:

.’Enfip 136:

you make

typing

error,

reissue

the

command.

Type DB@:=SY@P:

and press the RETURN key.

and

perform

the

Wait

seconds

step.

To redirect the primary front—-end file structure from the floppy disks
to
the front-end file system on the public structure, type DB@:=SY@:.
After 5 seconds, the REDIRECT program is finished and does not reprint
the prompt.
Proceed directly to the next step.
RED>DB@:=SY@:

Error:

<RET>

this operation

fails or

you make

mistake

and

the

system has printed the prompt RED>, reissue the command.
it still fails, perform Steps 119 through 121 and Steps
through
128, then continue at Step 135.
(Even this may

work.
You
may
have
to
beginning with Step 119.)

mp Step 137:
To start
second,
prompt

perform

all

the

If
126
not
again,

steps

Type <CTRL/\>.
the
the

front-end
Command
Parser,
system loads and starts the

type
<CTRL/\>.
Command Parser and

After
one
prints the

PARS.

<CTRL/\>
PAR%

‘Step 138:

Type RUN SAV and press the

start the

ready

SAVE program,

accept commands

PARSRUN

SAV

type

and

the

RETURN key.

RUN SAV.,
system

After one

prints

the

second,

prompt

<RET>

SAV>

Error:

you make

typing

error,

reissue

the command.

SAVE

SAV>.

CREATING THE

‘Step 139:

FRONT-END FILE

SYSTEM

Set the switch register to zero.

Before proceeding,

set the

switch

zero

(all

switches

down)
.

.’EWep

1409:

Type

SY@:/WB

and press

the

RETURN

key.

To save
the
system
bootstrap
and
the
front-end
monitor
in
the
front-end file system on the public structure, type SY@:/WB (WB stands
for Write Bootstrap).
After the bootstrap and the monitor are
saved,
the
system
prints a message and the front end restarts itself at the
save

entry point.

SAV>SY@:/WB <RET>
[DB@: dismounted]
[DX@: dismounted]
[DX1: dismounted]
|

RSX-20F

VvB15-21

12:19

[SY@:

redirected

[DBP:

mounted]

13-NOV-84

DB@:)

The last two messages inform you that the front end is using
on the TOPS-2# file system instead of on the floppy disks.
Error:

mpStep 141:

you make

typing

error,

reissue

the

files

store

them

command.

Store the floppy disks A and B.

Remove the floppy disks,
in a safe place.

insert

them

their

covers,

and

NOTE

If you have some spare floppies
available,
it
1is
a
good idea to copy System Floppies A and B to the spare
floppies for backup purposes.
Refer
to
the
TOPS-20
System Manager's Guide for this procedure.

‘Step 142:

Mount System Floppy C on drive #.

Mount System
in Chapter 2

»Step

143:

To start
second,
prompt

Floppy C in
if you have

Type
the
the

the left drive
trouble.)

(drive

0).

(Refer

Step

<CTRL/\>.

front-end Command Parser again, type <CTRL/\>.
loads and starts the Command Parser and

system

After
prints

one
the

PARS$.

<CTRL/\>
PARS

mpStep 144:
|

start

command

Type RUN MOU and press the RETURN key.
the

MOUNT

level,

the

program,
system

type

RUN

MOU.

prints

the

prompt

When

the

MOU>.

system

MOUNT

CREATING

PAR$RUN MOU

THE

FRONT-END FILE

SYSTEM

error,

the

<RET>

MOU>

Error:

mpStep 145:

you make

Type DX@:

typing

reissue

and press the RETURN key.

To allow the front end to use its reserved
program mounts floppy drive @, then prints
MOU>DX@:

MOU

command.

area, type DX@#:.
The MOUNT
the message MOUNT COMPLETE.

<RET>

-- MOUNT COMPLETE

MOU>

.’.Step 146:

Type

and

<CTRL/\>.

To terminate the MOUNT program and start the front-end Command Parser,
type
<CTRL/Z> followed by <CTRL/\>.
After about one second, when the
system is at Command Parser command level, it prints the prompt PARS%.
MOU>"Z
<CTRL/\>
PAR%

»Step 147:
To

run

prints

the

Type RUN

PIP and press the RETURN key.

PIP program,
the

PAR%RUN

prompt
PIP

type

RUN PIP,

When

PIP is at

command

level,

PIP>.

<RET>

PIP>

Error:

mpStep 148:

you make

typing

error,

retype

the

command.

Type DB@:*.*; *=DX@:*.*;* and press the RETURN key.

Copy
the
contents
of
System
Floppy
C
to
the
disk
by
typing
DB@:* ,%; ¥=DX@: % ,*; %
This copies the files on System Floppy C to the
disk.
When the files are copied, PIP prints the prompt PIP>.
PIP>DB@:z*
.*; *=DX@:*.*; * <RET>
PIP>

.’Stegrl49:

Type

DB@:/LI

and

press the RETURN key.

To get a list of the files on the front-end file system, type DB@:/LI.
The system prints the list of the files copied from floppies A, B, and
C.
Check it against the directory listing
shown
in
the
TOPS2@.BWR
file to be sure that you have all the files shown there.
The directory listing shown in
worry
about
the order of the

Figure 4-1 is only a
sample.
Do
not
files, generation numbers, or dates and

times when comparing the files.
The
second
column
1in
256-word
blocks)
listing

finished,

the

system

prints

file
sizes
should
be
the

prompt

(indicated
in
the
the same.
When the

PIP>.

CREATING

PIP>DB@:/LI

THE

FRONT-END

FILE

SYSTEM

<RET>

DIRECTORY

DB@:[5,5]

13-NOV-84

12:17

F11ACP.TSK;1521

12:04
12:04

KLX.MCB;
400
HALT.CMD;1

13-NOV-84

12:05

13-NOV-84

12:05

BOOT.EXB;11306

13-NOV-84

12:05

BF16N1.Al11;1

13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84

12:05

QOO0

13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84

TKTN. TSK; 1521
MOU.TSK;1521

BF64N1.Al11;1
SBA.CMD;1

SB1.CMD;1
CLOCK.CMD;1
EBUS.CMD;
1
DEX.CMD;1
KPALV.CMD;
1

TIMEO.CMD;1
FMPAR.CMD;
1

CRAM.CMD;
1
DRAM.CMD;
1

MTBOOT.EXB ;11306
LOOP.CMD;1
oNoNeNosEeNo
Ko ke Ko Ko Xe o ke Ne X Xe Ko Ke)

PARSER.TSK;
785
KLDISC.TSK;1521

KLRING.TSK;
1521

LOGXFR.TSK;1521
MIDNIT.TXK;1521
SETSPD.TSK;
1521

KLI.TSK;1515

T20ACP.TSK; 1521
BOO.TSK;1521

COP,TSK; 1521
DMO.TSK;1521

INI.TSK;1521
PIP.TSK;1521
RED.TSK; 1521

SAV.TSK;1521
UFD.TSK; 1521
ZAP.TSK;1521
RSX20F.SY¥S;1521

RSX20F.MAP;1521

154,

RP2DBT.EXB; 11306

69.
60.

RP2MBT.EXB; 11306

TOTAL

961.

BLOCKS

12: 04

12:05
12:05

12:06
12:06
12:06
12:06
12:06
12:06
12:06
12:07
12:07

12:07
12:07
12:07

13-NOV-84

12:08

13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84

12:98

12:08

13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84

12:08
12:08

13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84

12:09

13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84

12:99

41.

12:08
12:09
12:09
12:09

12:09
12:10

12:10
12:10
12:10
12:109

12:16
12:16
12:16

FILES

PIP>

Figure

4-1:

directory

names

<LANGUAGE-SOURCES>
DUMPER>EXIT

SBUILD

and

build

sources,

and

your

two

then

own

new

directories

the GALAXY sources.

choosing

and

place

<GALAXY-SOURCES>.

<RET>

PS:<LANGUAGE~SOURCES>

<RET>

[New]

SSWORKING 1300 <RET>
$SPERMANENT 1368 <RET>
$$ <RET>

SBUILD PS:<GALAXY-SOURCES>

<RET>

[New]

SSWORKING

3000

<RET>

$SPERMANENT 3008
$$ <RET>
$SDUMPER

<RET>

DUMPER>TAPE

MTA@:

<RET>

DUMPER>RESTORE PS:<*>*.,*
,* PS:<LANGUAGE-SOURCES>*.*
,* <RET>
Saveset ""LANGUAGE SOURCES FOR TOPS-20 V6.1""
Loading
End

files

into

Saveset.

PS:<LANGUAGE-SOURCES>

You can

—

INSTALLING

DISTRIBUTION TAPE

—

——

—

restored:
n
restored:
n
DUMPER>RESTORE PS:<*>*
* * PS;<GALAXY-SOURCES>*
* *
Saveset ""GALAXY SOURCES FOR TOPS-20 V6.1""
Loading files into PS:<GALAXY-SOURCES>
End of Tape.

—

files

pages

TOPS-20

<RET>

—

Total

—

Total

—

Total

THE

DUMPER>

.’.Step

182:

Type

EXIT

files

restored:

pages

restored:

Type
to

EXIT

leave

DUMPER>EXIT

and

press

the

RETURN

DUMPER

and

return

key.

TOPS-20

command

level.

<RET>

S
.’,Step

183:

UNLOAD MTAn:

SUNLOAD MTA@:
$

<RET>

‘Step

184:

Type

Remove
store

.’.Step

|
|

Type

Dismount

the
it

185:

UNLOAD

MTAn:

rewind

the

Distribution
a

safe

and

press

the

RETURN

unload

the

tape

software

tape

and

tape

the

Tools

(or

store

tape)

from

the

drive.

it.

from

the

Return to Step
(optional).

176

restore

files

Type DEASSIGN MTAn:

from

drive

SDEASSIGN MTA@:

and

for

tapes

example,

and press the RETURN key.

<RET>

Proceed to Step 188

other

tapes;

Type DEASSIGN MTAn:
to release the magnetic tape
for
users.
The system prints the TOPS-2¢ ENABLEd prompt.

mp Step 187:

tape

place.

Go back to Step 176 if you want to restore other
Tools tapes.
Otherwise, continue with Step 186.

mp Step 186:

key.

Chapter 7 to run UETP.

use

other

CHAPTER

RUNNING THE TOPS-20 UETP PACKAGE

Test
Environment
This chapter describes how to run the User
This program performs a cursory check of the system.
(UETP).

Package

repeatedly.
UETP starts a number of tests that can run either once or
the directory <UETP.LIB>, while the
1in
The source files are kept
the
in
stored
tests are
temporary data files and results of the

directory <UETP.RUN>.
Environment

Test

For more information on UETP,

refer to the User

Package Reference Manual.
NOTE

If you performed
you

manual,

can

steps

the

skip Steps

You should perform
Step 19@¢.
operator's
the
on
chapter
Otherwise, you must return to
chapter
this
in
steps
the

1in

Chapter

this

188 and 189 and start at

this
in
steps
all the
terminal (CTY).
console
the CTY after completing
to resume control of the

system.

7.1

RUNNING THE STANDARD TESTS

188 through 198

Perform Steps

’Step 188:
Type

run the standard UETP tests.

Type <CTRL/C>.
to

start a job.

Installation-test System,

TOPS-2@ Monitor 6.1(6763)

mp Step 189:

At the CTY,

the example

perform these

Installation-test System,

QLOGIN OPERATOR

TOPS-20 Monitor 6.1(6763)

your-password

<RET>

Job n on TTYn dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss,

QENABLE

<RET>

procedures.

Last Login dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss

RUNNING

I’»Step 190:
To

set

This

THE

TOPS-20

UETP

PACKAGE

Type TAKE PS:<UETP.LIB>SET-UP.CMD and press the RETURN key.

various

command

subdirectories,

file

contains

type

all

the

TAKE

PS:<UETP.LIB>SET-UP.CMD.

commands necessary

create

the

subdirectories.

STAKE

PS:<UETP.LIB>SET-UP.CMD <RET>

[New]

End

<UETP.LIB>SET-UP.CMD.1

$
.’.Step
Type

191:

Type CONNECT PS:<UETP.RUN>

CONNECT

standard

PS:<UETP.RUN>

192:

start

prompt

the

directory

that

has

the

prints

the

tests.

SCONNECT PS:<UETP.RUN>
$

.’Ekep

connect

and press the RETURN key.

Type
the

RUN

UETP

<RET>

UETP.EXE

program,

and

type

press
RUN

the

RETURN

UETP.EXE.

key.

The

system

UETP>.

$RUN UETP.EXE <RET>
[dd-mmm-yy

hh:mm:ss

User

Environment

Test

Package

]

UETP>

.}E&ep

193:

TAKE

Type

causes

(VERIFY)

time

the

VERIFY.CMD

VERIFY.CMD to

command

status

TAKE

the

begin.

UETP>TAKE

The

system

1In

[hh:mm:ss

the

standard
tests

prints

example,

VERIFY/CYCLE:1

ENABLE

UETP>ENABLE

[hh:mm:ss
UETP>ENABLE

(hh:mm:ss

RETURN

loaded

several
the

key.

verification
be

field

and

tests.
the

first

This
test

messages

followed

hh:mm:ss

indicates

the

BEGIN

COMPLETED]

DEFAULT COMPLETED]
RANCBL

ENABLE

COMPLETED]

RANFOR

ENABLE

COMPLETED]

MTAQ

ENABLE

Verify

that

COMPLETED]

UETP>DEFAULT/CYCLE:@0:15

[hh:mm:ss

the

<RET>

UETP>BEGIN

[hh:mm:ss

press

was generated.

VERIFY.CMD

UETP>ENABLE

the

standard

information.

message

load

and

COMPLETED]

installed

the

correct

software

RUNNING THE TOPS-20 UETP PACKAGE

UETP>STATUS

[dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss]

Cycle Times

Depth Status

Test

name

run

VERIFY VER

Running

RANFOR VER
VER
MTAQD

Enabled
Enabled

Enabled

RANCBL VER

START VERIFY
END
VERIFY

Error

Error Start

count limit time

g dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss

@:15
@:15

7}
@

)
/)

@
)

#:15

9:43:33
10:14:53
NOTE

and
If any messages appear between the START message
are errors in the files you
there
END message,
the
Do not proceed any further.
received.

The last two messages signify the beginning and ending of the test.
If the first test (VERIFY) finishes without error, go on to Step 194.
NOTE

drive
tape
a
use
In the following steps you should
1is not presently available to timesharing users.
that
If you have just completed the steps in Chapter 6, you
command to assign the
ASSIGN
TOPS-20
the
give
can
Otherwise,
186.
Step
in
drive that you deassigned
in Chapter 6 before
173
through
Steps 168
perform
continuing with

l’»Step 194:

Step

194.

Mount a magnetic tape on the drive you want to test.

random I/O
a
I/O COBOL test,
The standard tests include a random
Test MTAQ requires that a
FORTRAN test, and a magtape test for MTA@:.
blank magnetic tape be mounted on drive #.

than

other

drive

If you want to test a tape

drive #, you must enable the test for the selected

drive.

press
and
To enable the test for a specific drive, type ENABLE MTAn
the number of the drive; for example,
indicates
(n
the RETURN key
MTAl,

MTA2).

UETP>ENABLE MTAn

[hh:mm:ss

<RET>

ENABLE COMPLETED]

UETP>

Be sure that
Now mount a magnetic tape on the drive you want to test.
drive is on
the
that
and
tape
the
in
inserted
been
has
ring
write
a
line before

.’Step 195:

proceeding

the next step.

Type BEGIN and press the RETURN key.

To start the remaining tests, type BEGIN.

series

of messages.

The system

then

prints

RUNNING

THE

TOPS-20

UETP>BEGIN

<RET>

[hh:mm:ss

BEGIN COMPLETED]

UETP

PACKAGE

UETP>

START

RANCBL

hh:mm:ss

START

RANFOR

hh:mm:ss

START

MTAQ

hh:mm:ss

END

RANCBL

hh:mm:ss

END

RANFOR

hh:mm:ss

END

MTAQ

hh:mm:ss

messages

generating

@) Step

196:

other than those
the messages have

the

example

appear,

the

tests

failed.

STOP.

When all tests
information:

[All

shown

are

tests

completed,

complete

the

system

processor

prints

the

following

status

2102]

[dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss]
Test

Depth

Status

Cycle

name

mp Step

Times

Error

Start

run

count

limit

time

VERIFY

VER

Ended

dd-mmm-yy

hh:mm:ss

RANCBL

VER

Ended

B:15

dd-mmm-yy

hh:mm:ss

RANFOR

VER

Ended

g:15

MTAQ

dd-mmm-yy

VER

Ended

hh:mm:ss

@:15

]

dd-mmm-yy

hh:mm:ss

197:

STOP.

this point you can either type EXIT to terminate UETP, or
tests
for optional software.
The following step (Step 198)

skip

Step

.’.Step

198:

EXIT

terminate

Type

UETP.

and

proceed

198

Type
to

UETP>EXIT

7.2

RUNNING

want

UETP.

Then

Step

EXIT and press

end

you

the

test

optional

shows

you

the
how

should

199.

RETURN

continue

key.
Step

203.

<RET>

OPTIONAL

TESTS

The steps in this section describe how to enable
software
products.
Be
sure
to
enable tests
software products you have installed.

|
|

software,

begin

Table 7-1 contains a
and the UETP command

tests

for
the

optional
optional

list of optional software
products
for
needed to start the test for the product.

TOPS-20

only

for

RUNNING THE

]

|
I
|
|
|

Table 7-1:

UETP Commands

|
|

’Step

199:

for

TOPS-20

Optional

UETP

PACKAGE

Software Product Tests

Product

UETP Command

ALGOL-20

ENABLE ALGOL

APL-20

ENABLE APL

BASIC-PLUS-2

ENABLE

BASIC

COBOL-68

ENABLE

COBOL

COBOL-74

ENABLE CBL74

DBMS-20

ENABLE

DBMS

FORTRAN

ENABLE

FORTRA

SORT-20

ENABLE

SORT

Start tests

for optional

software products.

start a test for an optional software product, do the following:
l.

Type ENABLE product-name and press the RETURN key.
(Refer to
Table 7-1 for the correct command for your specific product.)
UETP>ENABLE product-name <RET>
[hh:mm:ss
ENABLE COMPLETED]
UETP>

Type an ENABLE command

Type

BEGIN and press

for each product you wish to

test.

the RETURN key.

UETP>BEGIN

<RET>

[hh:mm:ss

BEGIN COMPLETED]

UETP>

BEGIN starts the standard tests and all the optional software
tests
you
enabled.
The
system
starts
all
the
tests
immediately.

»Step 200:

Type STATUS and press the RETURN key.

Periodically give a STATUS command to find out which tests are running

and

how many times

they have

been

run.

NOTE

If there is a number other than # (zero) in the column
ERROR COUNT, print the ERRORS.LOG file, when the tests
are finished, to find out what caused the error.

RUNNING

STATUS

THE

TOPS-280

UETP

PACKAGE

Cycle

Times

Error

Start

run

count

limit

time

<RET>

[dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss]
Test

Depth

Status

name

VERIFY

VER

Ended

dd-mmm-yy

hh:mm:ss

RANCBL

VER

Running

@:15

]

dd-mmm-yy

hh:mm:ss

RANFOR
MTAQ

VER
VER

Queued
Queued

@:15
@:15

)
7/}

1}
]

@
@

dd-mmm-yy
dd-mmm-yy

hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss

the

example,

MTA@.SUP

tests

»Step 201:
The UETP
To
find
When all

the
are

RANCBL.SUP
in

wait

test

state,

running,

and

the

VERIFY.SUP

RANFOR.SUP
test

has

and

ended.

Type STATUS and press the RETURN key.
program does not notify
out when all the tests

the

resembles

tests

the

STATUS

you when all the tests are completed.
are completed, give a STATUS command.
completed, your output from the STATUS
command

are

following:

<RET>

[dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss]
Test

Depth

Status

Cycle

name

Error

Start

run

count

limit

time

VERIFY

VER

Ended

)

dd-mmm-yy

hh:mm:ss

RANCBL

VER

Ended

@:15

dd-mmm-yy

hh:mm:ss

RANFOR

VER

Ended

g:15

dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss

MTAQ

VER

Ended

@:15

dd-mmm-yy

‘Step 2p2:
To

Times

exit

TOPS-2¢

Type EXIT and press the RETURN key.

from

the

ENABLEd

EXIT

hh:mm:ss

UETP

program,

prompt

type

EXIT.

The

system

prints

the

($).

<RET>

$
Error:

If you try to exit while there are tests
still
running,
the
system
prints
the
message
"%You
still have tests running.
"ABORT ALL" before exiting."
Wait until
all
the
tests
are
completed

7.3

DELETING

Perform

Steps

created

.’»Step 203:

and

then

reissue

the

EXIT

command.

TEMPORARY DIRECTORIES
203

through

UETP

and

Type

TAKE

208

return

to
to

delete
a

the

timesharing

temporary

<UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD and press the

To delete the temporary directories,
The system prints the word [01d] for

7-6

type
each

directories

environment.

RETURN key.

TAKE <UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP,CMD.
directory it deletes.

RUNNING THE TOPS--2¢ UETP PACKAGE

<UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD <RET>

STAKE
[01d]

[0ld]

End

3
of <UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD.

Type DEASSIGN MTAn:

.’,Step 204:

and press the RETURN key.

for use by
to release the magnetic tape drive
Type DEASSIGN MTAn:
This is the tape drive you assigned prior to Step 194.
other users.

|
|

I
|
I

SDEASSIGN MTA@:

Type OPR and press the RETURN key.

..,Step 205:
I
I
I

return the CTY to
SOPR
OPR>

type OPR.

Type SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAn:

AVAILABLE and press

type SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAn:

AVAILABLE.

OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA@:
OPR>

hh:mm:ss

|
|

SJ
sJ

|
|
|

OPR>

AVAILABLE

Type

-- Tape Drive Set Available -MTAQ: set available for assignment by MOUNTR

Type EXIT and press the RETURN key.

OPR>EXIT

leave

resources,

-—- Tape Drive Set Available -MTA@: set available for assignment by MOUNTR

@: hh:mm:ss
@:

EXIT to

the

OPR program.

<RET>

» Step 2¢8:

RETURN

<RET>

OPR>

.’,Step 207:

the

key.

To return the tape drive you used to the pool of available

|
I
|
I

the OPR program,

<RET>

l’»Step 206:
I
I
I
I

<RET>

Start timesharing.

"APPENDIX A

UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-2# SOFTWARE

This appendix describes how to

install

Version

6.1

software

DECSYSTEM-20 now running TOPS-20 Version 5.1 software and is organized

follows:
A.l

Installation

Tools

Lists the tools you need to install the software.
Installing the TOPS-20 Version 6.1 Software

Describes how to prepare for installation, load the bundled
create a new configuration
software from magnetic tape,
5.1 system, and bring up
Version
the
down
shut
file,
command
the

Version

Reverting

6.1 system.

to TOPS-20 Version 5.1

Describes how to run
Version

Version

5.1

software

after

running

6.1.

Making the Version 6.1 Monitor the Primary Monitor

Describes the procedure for making the Version 6.1 monitor
your primary monitor by renaming the monitor and placing the
Version 6.1 front-end software on disk.

Making the Version 6.1 Monitor the Permanent Monitor

Describes the procedure for making the Version 6.1 monitor
permanent monitor by placing the Version 6.1 software
your
the
changing
in the directories <SYSTEM> and <SUBSYS> and

configuration command

file.

As you update the system, enter the commands in BOLD PRINT.
console terminal

A.l1

(CTY)

when performing these procedures.

INSTALLATION TOOLS

To install the TOPS-20 Version 6.1 software, you need:
The TOPS-20 RSX-2@F Version 15-21 System Floppy A.
The TOPS-20 RSX-2@F Version 15-21 System Floppy B.
The TOPS-20 RSX-2@F Version 15-21 System Floppy C.

Use

the

UPDATING

Refer
the

The

A separate
purchased.

tape

Chapter

Sections

floppies

A.2

TOPS-20

THE

and

INSTALLING

DECSYSTEM-2#

Installation

for

each

Tape

and

VERSION

6.1

TOPS-20

Version

Creating

Restoring

Renaming

the

Version

Creating

the

new configuration

Setting

Shutting

down

Starting

the

Preparing

Before

you

system

the

system

the

your

5.1

for

Version

the

Delete

directories

Mount
for

the

number

Version

the

command

directory

eight

into

file.

<OPERATOR>.

6.1

read

the

any last
TOPS-2¢

listing

labeled

minute changes made
software.
Then,

to
to

software,

free

pages

created

6.1

installation,

OPERATOR

TTY9

<RET>

the

structure.

UETP.

Installation

perform

public

Steps

tape.
1

through

17.

enable WHEEL or OPERATOR privileges.

Installation-test
3

divided

CHECKD.

You must be enabled and have
Follow the example to log in

Job

monitor.

installation,

Obtain

@ENABLE

software

Installation

@LOGIN

about

new software.

Run

mpStep 1:

information

DECSYSTEM-24.

prepare

have

software.

TOPS-20.BWR.
This
1listing describes
the installation procedure or
to
the
prepare

you

directories.

bundled

parameters

begin

for

product

installation.

the

for

1.2.2,

6.1

Preparing

the

software

SOFTWARE

A.2.1

for

6.1.

tape.

THE

The installation
tasks:

Version

optional

1.2.1

Installation

SOFTWARE

privileges
and enable

System,

TOPS-2@

your-password

23-May-85

<RET>

16:56:38

to perform
these
your capabilities.
Monitor

5.1(15054)

procedures.

UPDATING

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

SOFTWARE

NOTE

If you are using the OPR program at
EXIT
command
to
OPR
to
return

the CTY, give
the
to TOPS-20 command

level.

mp Step 2:

Run CHECKD.

You must run CHECKD before installing the new software.
This is
done
to
verify
that
the
directories
on
the public structure (PS:) are
intact.

Follow the

SCHECKD

example

run

CHECKD.

<RET>»

CHECKD>CHECK

[WORKING

DIRECTORY

ON STRUCTURE

CHECKD>EXIT

PS:

<RET>

- PS:]

<RET>

Depending on what CHECKD finds, you may have a long wait while
CHECKD
works on checking PS:.
The ouput you receive while running CHECKD may
or may not resemble the output in the example.
Refer
to
the
CHECKD
Specification

l’»Steg 3:

Type

for more

information.

INFORMATION DISK-USAGE and press the RETURN key.

You must have enough disk space on your public structure (PS:)
before
you
can
proceed.
To find out how many free pages there are on PS:,
type INFORMATION DISK-USAGE.
The system prints the
number
of
pages
assigned

you and

the

number

SINFORMATION DISK-USAGE

free

pages on

PS:.

<RET>

PS: <OPERATOR>

|
|
|
I

1942 Pages assigned, 1925 in use, 1 deleted
5000 Working pages, 5000 Permanent pages allowed
27180 Pages free on PS:, 189196 pages used.

$
NOTE

The number of free pages on
If you do not have at least
you must dump some files to
some

PS: must be at least 6004.
this number of pages free,
tape or delete and expunge

files.

.’.Steg 4:
I

|
|

|
I
I
I
I

Type TAKE PS:<UETP,LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD and press the RETURN key.

Before installing the

directories created

new

UETP.

software,
Type

the

you

STAKE PS:<UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD <RET>
[014]
[014]

End

<UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD

must

delete

TAKE command

to do

the

so.

various

UPDATING

.’EWep 5:

another

SCONNECT PS:<SYSTEM>
$

SOFTWARE

directory

the
in

RETURN key.
order

perform

the

<RET>

Type BUILD PS:<UETP.LIB> and press the RETURN key.

Before you can load
must delete the o0ld

DECSYSTEM-20

Type CONNECT PS:<SYSTEM> and press

You must be connected
following steps.

mp Step 6:

THE

the new version of the UETP program onto
version of the PS:<UETP.LIB> directory.

SBUILD PS:<UETP.LIB>
[01d]

PS:,

you

<RET>

$$
NOTE

If you find that the UETP directories do not exist
on
your
system,
1ignore
any
error messages you receive
while deleting them in the following steps.

mpStep 7:
Use

the

Type KILL and press the RETURN key.
KILL

command

delete

the

o0ld

PS:<UETP.LIB>

directory.

$SKILL <RET>
[Confirm]

mp Step 8:
To

Press the RETURN key twice.

confirm

you

are

deleting

PS:<UETP.LIB>,

press

the

RETURN

key

[Confirm] <RET>

SS<RET>
$

‘Step 9:

|
|

Delete

Follow the

the

example

SBUILD

directories

delete

PS:<UETP.RUN>

and

PS:<UETP>.

<RET>

[01d]

$SKILL <RET>

[Confirm] <RET>

SS<RET>
SBUILD PS:<UETP> <RET>
[01d]

SSKILL <RET>

[Confirm] <RET>

SS<RET>
$

NOTE

|
|

If you have tape
Steps 18 through

drive
allocation
-enabled,
perform
14.
Otherwise, continue at Step 15.

twice.

UPDATING

mp Step 19:
Type

OPR

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

SOFTWARE

Type OPR and press the RETURN key.
to

run

the

OPR program.

SOPR <RET>

OPR>

.’Efifip

11:

Type

SHOW STATUS

TAPE-DRIVE /ALL and

press

the RETURN key.

To find out what drives on the
system
are
available
to
mount
the
Installation
tape,
type
SHOW
STATUS
TAPE-DRIVE
/ALL.
The system
prints the status of all tape drives on
the
system.
Use
any
tape
drive
that has the status of "UNLOADED" for mounting the Installation
tape.

OPR>SHOW STATUS

TAPE-DRIVE /ALL

<RET>

OPR>

17:00:09
DRIVE
STATE
MTAQ:

--Tape
VOLID

Drive
REQ#

Status-JOB#
USER

Available

MTAl:

Unloaded
AVR:

MTA2:

Yes

Unloaded
AVR:

MTA3:

Yes

Unloaded
AVR:

MTA7:

Yes

Unavailable

OPR>

mp Step 12:

Type SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAn

UNAVAILABLE and

press

the

RETURN

key.

To mount the TOPS-2¢ Installation
tape,
you
should
first
make
an
available
tape
drive
unavailable to timesharing users.
To do this,
type SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAn UNAVAILABLE.
The example uses MTA@:
as
the
tape
drive,
but you can specify any tape drive that is not in use at
the

moment.

OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAQ:

Enter

.’.Step 13:

text and

Type

UNAVAILABLE

terminate with

<RET>

INSTALLING VERSION 6.1 SOFTWARE and press <CTRL/Z>.

After the system prints "Enter text and terminate with "Z,"
type
text
INSTALLING
VERSION
6.1
SOFTWARE
and then type <CTRL/Z>.
system

prints

the

OPR prompt

and

several messages.

the
The

Enter text and terminate with "2
INSTALLING VERSION 6.1 SOFTWARE "2
OPR>

17:01:41
SJ

—-- Tape Drive Set Unavailable -MTA@: set unavailable for assignment

PTYCON>

***%

@:
0:

17:01:41

OPR>

SJ
sJ

OPR>

OPR(6)

17:@1l:41

by MOUNTR

****

-- Tape Drive Set Unavailable -MTA@: set unavailable for assignment by MOUNTR

UPDATING

»Step 14:

Type

EXIT and

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

press the RETURN key.

To return to TOPS-2@¢
command
1level
and
procedures, type EXIT.
The system prints

!
I
I
|

OPR>EXIT

SOFTWARE

continue
the
installation
the ENABLEd prompt ($).

<RET>

mpStep 15:

Type ASSIGN MTA@:

To assign tape drive @ to
prints the ENABLEd prompt
SASSIGN MTA@:

and press the RETURN key.

your
($).

job,

type

ASSIGN

MTAQ:.

The

system

<RET>

Step
|
|

|
|
|

Mount

Mount the
the drive

.’.Step

I
I
|
I
I
I
|
|
I

16:

Version

Version 6.1
is on line.

17:

Type

position

6.1

Installation

REWIND MTA@:

the

tape

SREWIND MTA@:

Installation

and

its

tape

press

beginning,

tape on MTA@:.

the

tape

the

RETURN

type

the

drive.

sure

key.

REWIND command.

<RET>

A.2.2

Creating

You must
testing
DLUSER

Type

System

Directories

create directories
the
system.
You

program

.}Step 18:
I
I
I
l

the

Type

(Steps

SKIP MTAg:

SKIP MTA@:

SSKIP MTA@:

2 FILES

M) Step 19:
To run the
the DLUSER

to
store
system
files
and
<create
these
directories by
through 21).

FILES

Type RUN MTA@:

files
running

2 FILES and press the RETURN key.
to

position

the

tape

the

DLUSER

program.

<RET>

and press the RETURN key.

DLUSER program from magnetic tape, type RUN
MTAQ:.
program starts, the system prints the DLUSER prompt.

SRUN MTA@:

for
the

After

<RET>

DLUSER>

Error:

If you make a typing mistake,
rewind
the
files, and reissue the above command.
The
shows how to do this when the Installation
SREWIND MTA@: <RET>
SSKIP MTA@: 2 FILES
SRUN MTA@: <RET>
DLUSER>

<RET>

tape,
skip
two
following example
tape is on MTA#:.

UPDATING THE

Type LOAD MTAP:

mpStep 20:

DECSYSTEM-20 SOFTWARE.

and press the RETURN key.

<SYSTEM-ERROR)>
and
To load the parameters for the directories <UETP>
type LOAD
tape,
Installation
TOPS-20
the
from
system
file
the
into
the
DONE. and gives
After a few seconds, the system prints
MTAQ:.
DLUSER

prompt.

DLUSER>LOAD MTA@:

<RET>

DONE.

DLUSER>

Type EXIT and press the RETURN key.

‘}Step 21:

Type EXIT to leave the DLUSER program.

ENABLEd

prompt

The system prints the

TOPS-20

($).

DLUSER>EXIT

<RET>

$
NOTE

You may want to check the directories before restoring
To do so, type the command
Version 6.1 software.
the
old
the
Be sure that
INFORMATION DISK-USAGE PS:<*>,
versions of the files are cleared from the directories
that you will be using for Version 6.1 files.

Restoring TOPS-20 Bundled Software from Tape

A.2.3

into the
The DUMPER program places files from the magnetic tape
on the
file
fifth
the
is
program
DUMPER
(The
system.
file
TOPS-28
Once you have DUMPER running, restore the files
Installation tape.)
and
PS: <NEW-SUBSYS>,
PS: <NEW-SYSTEM>,
directories
the
to
PS:<UETP.LIB>.

Perform Steps 22 through 34 to run
software,

l’.Step 22:

and to dismount the

Type RUN MTA@:

DUMPER,

the system prints the DUMPER prompt.

SRUN MTA@:

the

bundled

DUMPER

program

restore

and press the RETURN key.

To run the DUMPER program, type RUN MTA@:.

starts,

Installation tape.

After the

<RET>

DUMPER>

Error:

If you receive any errors, rewind the tape, skip four

files

The following example shows
reissue the command above.
and
contact
If errors still persist,
how to do this for MTA@:.
DIGITAL

Software

Support.

SREWIND MTA@: <RET>
SSKIP MTA@G: 4 FILES
SRUN MTA@: <RET>
DUMPER>

<RET>

UPDATING

*Step 23:

Type TAPE MTAQ:
ACCOUNT

tell

THE

the

MTAQ: .

system-default

and

press

SYSTEM-DEFAULT

DUMPER

Then

DECSYSTEM-20

program

type

which

ACCOUNT

and

tape

SOFTWARE

the

press

RETURN
the

drive

SYSTEM-DEFAULT

key.

RETURN

you

are

tell

Then

type

TAPE

key.

using,
DUMPER

use

the

account.

DUMPER>TAPE

MTA@:

DUMPER>ACCOUNT

<RET>

SYSTEM-DEFAULT

<RET>

DUMPER>

mp Step 24:
To
on

have
your

Type FILES and press the RETURN key (optional).
the files
terminal,

DUMPER>FILES

being restored into the
type FILES.
The system

individual
prints the

directories typed
DUMPER prompt.

<RET)>

DUMPER>

mp Step 25:

Type RESTORE PS:<*>*.*.* PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>*.*.* and press
RETURN

copy
the
TOPS-2¢
monitor
and
its
related
Installation
tape to your public structure, type
This DUMPER command restores all the files in the

directory

PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>.

DUMPER>RESTORE

Saveset

the

key.

Then

the

system

prints

programs
from
the
the RESTORE command.
first saveset to the

the

PS:<*>%*
% . * PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>*
,* *

""SYSTEM

FILES

Loading files into
of Saveset.

FOR

TOPS-20

PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>

DUMPER

prompt.

<RET>

V6.1""

End

Total

files

restored:

Total

pages

restored:

DUMPER>
NOTE

You may receive an error message from DUMPER about
it
deleting existing files.
This happens when you do not
delete the previous version of software and write over
the
files.
This is an informational message and you
should continue with your installation.

mp Step 26:

Type RESTORE PS:<*>*.*.* PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>*.*.* and press
RETURN

the

key.

To restore the system program files to the directory
PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>,
type the RESTORE command.
The system prints the DUMPER prompt.
DUMPER>RESTORE

Saveset

Loading
End

files

FILES

into

PS: <NEW-SUBSYS>*,*
,*

FOR

TOPS-20

PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>

Saveset.

Total

files

Total

pages

DUMPER>

PS:<*>*
% ,*

""SUBSYS

restored:
restored:

n
n

Vé6.1""

<RET>

UPDATING

.’Steg

27:

Type

RESTORE

RETURN

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

SOFTWARE

PS:<*>*
,* ,* PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>*.*.*

and

press

the

Key.

To restore the GALAXY files into the directory
PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>,
type
the
RESTORE
command.
When
all
the files are restored, the system
prints

the

DUMPER

prompt.

DUMPER>RESTORE PS:<*>%*
% ,* PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>*
,* * <RET>
Saveset ""GALAXY SUBSYS FILES FOR TOPS-2# V6.1""
Loading files into PS: {NEW-SUBSYS>
End of Saveset.

Total

files

restored:

Total

pages

restored:

DUMPER>

Bp Step 28:

Type RESTORE PS:<*>*.*,* PS:<UETP,LIB>*.*.*

RETURN

key.

and

press

the

To restore the files for the User
Environment
Test
Package
(UETP),
type the RESTORE command.
When all the files are restored, the system
prints

the

DUMPER

prompt.

DUMPER>RESTORE PS:<*>*
* * PS:<UETP.LIB>*,*
.,% <RET>
Saveset ""UETP FILES FOR TOPS-20 V6.1""
Loading files into PS:<UETP.LIB>
End of Tape.

Total
Total

files
pages

restored:
restored:

n
n

DUMPER>

mp Step 29:
Type

EXIT

Type EXIT and press the RETURN key.
to

end

DUMPER>EXIT

DUMPER and

return

TOPS-28

command

level.

<RET>

mp Step 38:

Type UNLOAD MTA@:

To unload the Installation
MTA@:.
The system rewinds

SUNLOAD MTA@:
$
You can now remove

mpstep 31:

and press the RETURN key.
tape
from
and unloads

tape
drive,
type
tape from the drive.

UNLOAD

<RET>

the

tape

from

Type DEASSIGN MTAP:

SDEASSIGN MTA@:

<RET>

the

tape

drive.

and press the RETURN key.

To remove the device MTA@:
from
system prints the ENABLEd prompt

the
the

your job,
($).

type

DEASSIGN

MTA#@:.

The

UPDATING

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

SOFTWARE

NOTE

|
|
|

If you performed Step 12, which removed
from
the system's usage, perform Steps
Otherwise, continue at Step 35.

mp Step 32:

Type OPR and press the RETURN key.

I
I
I

return

SOPR
OPR>

.’.Step

33:

OPR

command

level,

type

a
32

tape
drive
through 34.

OPR.

<RET>

Type

SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAn:

AVAILABLE and

press

the

RETURN

Key.

To return the tape drive you removed from system
usage
in
Step
type SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAn:
AVAILABLE.
The example uses MTAf:.

OPR>SET

|
|
|
|
|

TAPE-DRIVE

MTA@:

AVAILABLE

12,

<RET>

OPR>
17:23:53
SJ
SJ

@:
@:

|
|
|

SJ
SJ
SJ

@:
@:
@:

OPR>

.’.Step 34:

-- Tape Drive Set Available -MTAQ: set available for assignment
PTYCON>
***% OPR(6) 17:23:53 ***%*
17:23:53

~MTA@Q:

by MOUNTR

Tape Drive Set Available -set available for assignment

by MOUNTR

OPR>

Type

EXIT and press the RETURN key.

return to TOPS-2¢0
command
level
and
procedures, type EXIT.
The system prints
OPR>EXIT

continue
the
installation
the ENABLEd prompt ($).

<RET>

A.2.4

Renaming

the

Version

5.1

Monitor

case you ever need to revert to the Version 5.1 monitor,
you
must
rename
it
before
copying
the
Version
6.1
monitor
into
<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE.
Perform Steps 35 through 38 to rename the Version
5.1
monitor
and
to copy the Version 6.1 monitor and certain network
files to <SYSTEM>.

l} Step 35:
You

must

Type CONNECT PS:<SYSTEM> and press the RETURN key.
be

connected

the

appropriate

procedures.

SCONNECT PS:<SYSTEM> <RET>
$

directory

perform

these

UPDATING

QStep 36:

Type RENAME
RETURN

THE

DECSYSTEM-2#

MONITR.EXE.*

SOFTWARE

5-1-MONITR.EXE.*

and

press

the

key.

To rename and save the Version 5.1 monitor, type
When
the
rename is successfully completed, the

the
RENAME
command.
system prints an [OK]

message.

SRENAME MONITR.EXE.*

5-1-MONITR.EXE.*

<RET>

$
TCP/IP

Installations

If you are performing a TCP/IP installation, you
must
choose
a
TOPS-2¢
monitor
at
this time.
After you
restore the TCP/IP Distribution tape, you will be able
to choose a TCP/IP monitor.

.’.Step 37:

Type COPY PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>montyp.EXE.* MONITR.EXE.*
the

RETURN

and

press

key.

To copy the Version
6.1
monitor
into
PS:<SYSTEM>,
type
the
COPY
command.
"Montyp"
designates
the type of monitor you have selected
for your system;
for
example,
2060--MONBIG.
(Refer
to
Chapter
3
Section
3.1
for
information
about
choosing
a
monitor
for
your
system.)
When the copy is successfully completed, the
system
prints
an

[OK]

message.

SCOPY PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>montyp.EXE.* MONITR.EXE.*
<{NEW-SYSTEM>montyp.EXE.n => MONITR.EXE.n [OK]

mp Step

38:

Type COPY
the

PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>IPALOD.EXE.*

RETURN

<RET>

IPALOD.EXE.*

and

press

Kkey.

The file IPALOD.EXE must be in the directory <SYSTEM> in order for the
CI2@
microcode to be loaded properly in Step 57 of this appendix.
To
do this, type
the
COPY
command.
When
the
copy
1is
successfully
completed,

the

system

prints

[OK]

message.

SCOPY PS:<NEW--SYSTEM>IPALOD.EXE.* IPALOD.EXE.* <RET>
<NEW-SYSTEM>IPALOD.EXE.n =>

IPALOD.EXE.n

[OK]

$
.>.Step 39:

I
I
I
I
!
I
I
I

IEEe COPY PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>KNILDR.EXE.* KNILDR.EXE.*
the

RETURN

key.

and

press

The file KNILDR.EXE must be in the directory <SYSTEM> in order for the
Ethernet
microcode to be loaded properly in Step 57 of this appendix.
To do this, type the COPY command.
When
the
copy
1is
successfully
completed,

the

system

prints

[OK]

message.

$COPY PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>KNILDR.EXE.* KNILDR.EXE.* <RET>
<{NEW-SYSTEM>KNILDR.EXE.n => KNILDR.EXE.n [OK]

UPDATING

|
I
|
|
|

A.2.5

Creating

the

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

Configuration

Command

You must create the
configuration
parameters.
Perform
Steps
40

SOFTWARE

File

command
through

file
to
declare
system
43
to
«create
the
file

<NEW-SYSTEM>6-1-CONFIG.CMD.
NOTE

|
|
|
|
|

This
section
describes
how
to
create
the
configuration
command file.
The steps illustrate
use of the EDIT
editor
program.
You
can
use
editor
of
your choice, as long as you accomplish
goal of each step.

l’.Step 4¢9:

Type EDIT 5-1-CONFIG.CMD
press

edit

the

RETURN

5-1-CONFIG.CMD

"Edit:

PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>6-~1-CONFIG.CMD

and

key.

and

PS: <NEW-SYSTEM>6-1-CONFIG.CMD,

prints

new
the
any
the

have
type

<SYSTEM>5-1-CONFIG.CMD"

$EDIT

5-1-CONFIG.CMD

Edit:

PS:<SYSTEM>5-1-CONFIG.CMD.n

the

changes

EDIT

and

the

placed

command.

EDIT

The

in
system

prompt.

PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>6-1-CONFIG.CMD

<RET>

.’,Step
|
|

41:

Type

EDIT:
*p~:%

.’.Step

42:

I
|

Chapter

I
I
|
|
|
I

the

RETURN

key.

Read

system

prints

PS:<SYSTEM>5-1-CONFIG.CMD.n
<RET>

Chapter 3 of this guide.
of

this

guide,

Tailoring

changes
to the system parameters
that must be added are:

|
|
|
|
|

and press

To print the contents of 5-1-CONFIG.CMD, type P":*,
The
the entire 5-1-CONFIG.CMD file and then the EDIT prompt.

P":*

that

are

the

System,

necessary.

and

Five

make

any

parameters

DEFINE SY¥S: PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>,PS:<SUBSYS>
DEFINE SYSTEM: PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>,PS:<SYSTEM>
DEFINE SERR: PS:<SYSTEM-ERROR>
NODE nodename nodenumber
LAT-STATE OFF

Other information to be added includes parameters for MSCP-served disk
drives,
daylight
savings
time,
remote
1line conditions, and system
level information.
After

you make your changes
reading
Chapter
3,
return
installation at Step 43.

the
this

configuration

appendix

command
file
by
continue your update

UPDATING

THE

DECSYSTEM-2¢

SOFTWARE

NOTE

When you are making a change
5-1-CONFIG.CMD
file,
use
line-number."
Any
changes

existing lines of
the
the
EDIT
command
"R
made
to
the
system
parameters
are
made
in
<NEW-SYSTEM>6-1-CONFIG.CMD.
The file <SYSTEM>5-1-CONFIG.CMD remains the same.

|
|

mpStep 43:
After
press

Press the ESCape key.

you make all
the
ESCape

*EU

Type EU and press the RETURN key.

the necessary changes
to
the
system
parameters,
key.
Then type EU and press the RETURN key.
This

command ends the EDIT program
the name of the output file.

6708

and

saves

the

file.

The

system

prints

<RET>

[PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>6-1-CONFIG.CMD.
1]

$
NOTE

|
|
|
|

Before bringing up the system under Version
6.1,
you
should
check
the
6-1-PTYCON,ATO
file
against
the
5-1-PTYCON.ATO file.
You do not have to compare these
files
if
you
have not changed the Version 5.1 file.
However, if you have made
your
own
changes
to
the
5-1-PTYCON.ATO
file
and
you
wish
those changes to
exist under Version 6.1, you must add the
changes
¢to
the 6-1-PTYCON.ATO file.

|
|
|

A.2.6
|
|
|

Parameters

for

You must be certain that the
and
has
IPCF (InterProcess
so by giving the commands in

.’.Step

Setting

Type

44:

Type

BUILD

subcommand
|

BUILD

operator is a member of
Communication Facility)
Steps 44 through 47.

PS:<OPERATOR>

PS:<OPERATOR>.
prompt

SBUILD
[01d]

The

and

press

system

the

user
group
capabilities.

RETURN

prints

1040
Do

key.

[01d],

then

the

($$).

PS:<OPERATOR>

<RET>

$$
.}Ewep 45:
|
|

At
of

Type

USER 100

and

the subcommand prompt,
user group 1040.

$SUSER 100 <RET>
$$

press the RETURN

type

USER

10f

key.

make

the

operator

member

UPDATING

»Step 46:
|

Type

IPCF

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

SOFTWARE

IPCF and press the RETURN key.

give

the

operator

IPCF capabilities.

SSIPCF <RET>

mp Step 47:
To

exit

Press the RETURN key.
from

subcommand

level,

press

the

RETURN

key.

SS<RET>
$
TCP/IP
If

you are
Section

A.2.7

Shutting

l’ffiep 48:

installing TCP/IP-28,
Step 2.

proceed

Appendix

C.3,

Down

To shut down the
Steps 48 through

Installations

the

Version
54.

DECSYSTEM-20
5.1

software

the

DECSYSTEM-20,

perform

Type "ECEASE +1 and press the RETURN key.

To bring the system down
prints several messages.

S$"ECEASE +1

<RET>

[System

going

[System

down]

down

PTYCON>»

one

minute!!

Killed

Job

User

name,

hh:mm:ss,

Used

h:mm:ss

dd-mmm-yy

Shutdown

in one minute, type "ECEASE +l.
The
system
The last message is "Shutdown complete."

Account

name,

TTY n,

h:mm:ss

complete
NOTE

Do not proceed to Step
"Shutdown complete.”

»Step 49:
At

the

until

the

system

Type <CTRL/\>.

console

terminal,

Command
Parser.
system prints the

When
prompt

type

you
are
PAR>.

Command

return

Parser

M) Step 50:
To

stop

prints

Type SHUTDOWN and press the RETURN key.
the

TOPS-20

monitor,

type

SHUTDOWN.

the

command

front-end

level,

the

UPDATING

PAR>SHUTDOWN

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

SOFTWARE

<RET>

**HALTED**

$DECSYSTEM-2@

A.2.8

Starting

the

RUNNING

New Software

start the Version 6.1 software,

m) Step 51:

NOT

perform

Steps

51 through

62.

Type <CTRL/\>.

Type <CTRL/\> to return to the front-end Command Parser.
Because
the
system
is
not running, you will see the prompt PAR%.
If you see the
prompt

PAR>

instead,

back

Step

580.

<CTRL/\>
PARS%

.Step

52:

Type RUN PIP and

press the RETURN key.

To load the PIP program and start it, type RUN PIP.
After
1
second,
PIP
is
ready for you to type commands.
The system prints the prompt
PIP>.

PARSRUN

PIP

<RET>

PIP>

‘Step

53:

Type

KL.CFG;*/DE and

press the RETURN key.

You must delete any existing front-end configuration
file
from
your
front-end
file
system
before
bringing up the Version 6.1 front-end
monitor.

PIP>KL.CFG;*/DE

<RET>

PIP>

NOTE

you
If the system prints PIP -- NO SUCH FILE(S), then
did
not
have
a front-end configuration file in your
front-end file system.
Proceed to Step 54.

mp Step 54:

Type <CTRL/Z> and <CTRL/\>.

To end PIP and return to the front-end Command Parser,
followed

<CTRL/\>.

PIP>"2
<CTRL/\>
PAR%

type

UPDATING

.’.Step

|
|

Set
and

56:

Set

the

the switch
2 up.

.’.Step

DECSYSTEM-20

SOFTWARE

Mount the Version 6.1 System Floppy A in floppy drive @
the Version 6.1 System Floppy B in floppy drive 1.

To run the Version
drive # and System

*Step

|
|

55:

THE

57:

6.1 front-end software,
Floppy B in drive 1.

switch

Press

the

mount

000007

ENABLE

and

(octal)

System

Floppy

and

(octal).

by placing

switches

SWITCH-REGISTER buttons

simultaneously.

To bring up the Version 6.1 front—-end file system,
press
the
ENABLE
and
SWITCH-REGISTER
buttons
simultaneously.
The
system
prints a
series of messages.

RSX-2¢F

VB15-21

12:19

13-NOV-84

[SY@:
redirected to DX@:]
[DX@:
mounted]
[DX1l:
mounted]
KLI -- VERSION VB15-15 RUNNING
KLI -- ENTER DIALOG [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]?

KLI>

W) Step 58:
To
to

Type NO and press the RETURN key.

tell the
dialog

system

KLI

front-end monitor that you want
questions,
type NO.
The front

reloaded,

and

the

ENTER

KLI>NO

<RET>

KLI

KL1¢

S/N:21¢2.,

KLI

KL19

HARDWARE

MOS

DIALOG

MASTER

bootstrap

it to take
end prints

program

gives

default answers
messages as the

the

BOOT>

prompt.

[NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]?

MODEL B,

HERTZ

ENVIRONMENT:

OSCILLATOR

EXTENDED ADDRESSING
INTERNAL

CHANNELS

CACHE

KLI

-- MICROCODE

KLI

LOGICAL

ALL

Version

CACHES

MEMORY

2.@[407]

LOADED

ENABLED

CONFIGURATION.

ADDRESS

SIZE

INT

TYPE

00000008

768K

MF20

CONTROLLER

KLi —— CONFIGURATION FILE WRITTEN
KLI

BOOT

BOOTSTRAP

LOADED AND

STARTED

V11.0(311)

BOOT>

M) Step 59:
To

tell

prints

Press the RETURN key.
BOOT

several

restart

messages

the

system,

before

press

prompting

A-16

the

for

RETURN

key.

The

the date

and

time.

system

UPDATING

THE

DECSYSTEM-2@

SOFTWARE

BOOT><RET>

[BOOT: LOADING]

[PS

[OK]

MOUNTED]

[INDEX-TABLE

[IPALOD:
System
ENTER

BEING

CI2@

restarting,
CURRENT

INITIALIZED

FOR

MICROCODE

PPN

SUPPORT]

1.0@(705)]

[OK]

wait...

DATE

AND

TIME:

NOTE

the

system

program

asks

structure
for

the

name

not

PS:,

the

BOOT

name.

CI124

You will
microcode
software

.’ Step

60:

Type

receive
the
message
concerning
the
CI20
only
1if
you
are
installing
the TOPS-20
on a DECSYSTEM-2@ with CI24.

the

date

and

time,

then

After

the prompt, type the date and
time must be in 24-hour format.

The

ENTER

DATE

AND

HAVE

ENTERED

THURSDAY,

THIS

CORRECT

(Y,N)

you

Type Y

have

THIS

WHY

entered
you

type

CORRECT

and

the
N,

press

correct
the

(Y,N)

23-MAY-85

1750

<RET>

23-MAY-1985

5:5@

PM,

the

RETURN
format

RETURN

Kkey.

and

time,

date

system
Y

time

the
the

TIME:

YOU

m) Step 61:
type

CURRENT

press

asks

for

the

type
date

key.
dd-mmm-yy hhmm.

VY.
and

Otherwise,
time

<RET>

RELOAD?

CI20

your system configuration does
not
ignore
the
following
message
when
monitor:
BUGCHK
COULD

"NOLODF"
NOT

FIND

AT dd-mmm-yy
CI-20

include
CI2¢,
you
start
the

hh:mm

MICROCODE

LOAD

PROGRAM

Ethernet

If your
system
configuration
Ethernet,
1ignore the following
the

does
not
include
an
message when you start

monitor:

BUGCHK

"KNICFF"

AT dd-mmm-yy

PHYKNI

RELOAD

CANNOT

THE

hh:mm:ss

KLNI

again.

UPDATING THE

l’»Step 62:
When

DECSYSTEM-20

SOFTWARE

Type NEW and press the RETURN key.

the

system asks

WHY

RELOAD?

[CHECKING
Checking
[WORKING

why you are

NEW.

NEW <RET>

STRUCTURE

LOCAL COUNT
LOCAL COUNT
LOCAL COUNT

THERE

type

FILE CONSISTENCY]
system structure.
-

PS:]

$PS: <OPERATOR>PTYCON.LOG.1

SYSTEM
SYSTEM

reloading,

OF
OF
OF

IS A

"NEW"

FILE

FILE PAGES: 58009
OVERHEAD PAGES: 7873
USED PAGES: 65882

COUNT BEFORE CHECKD: 65943
COUNT AFTER CHECKD: 65943
ARE

LOST

PAGES

Check of system structure completed.
ADDRESSES ARE IN FILE PS:<OPERATOR>PS-LOST-PAGES.BIN.1
RUNNING

DDMP

CI29

If you have CI20¢ and it
is
on,
series
of
messages
about
its
starting, and opening circuits.
for your information only.
The

CHECKD program

examines

the

you
may
receive
a
activities - loading,
These
messages
are

entire disk

file

system,

reports

any

errors,
and
tries
to
correct the errors.
(Your system output will
probably be different from the example.
See the CHECKD
Specification
for additional information.)
When the system finishes running CHECKD,
it then runs the DDMP program.
The DDMP program is a background
task
that
moves pages from the disk swapping area to the disk file system.
When

DDMP

finishes,

RUNNING

the

system

runs

SYSJOB.

DDMP

SYSJOB 6A(20) STARTED AT 23-MAY-85
[KNILDR: LOADING MICROCODE VERSION

17:54:12
1(162) INTO

2]
khkkkk

23-MAY-85

17:54:12

TGHA

V4(0)

*kkkk

RUN

SYS:INFO

RUN

SYS:MAPPER

RUN

SYS:ORION

RUN

SYS:QUASAR

RUN

SYS:MOUNTR

RUN

SYS:MAILER

RUN

SYS:LPTSPL

RUN

SYS:LPTSPL

RUN

SYS:CDRIVE

RUN

SYS:SPRINT

JOB

O /LOG

ENA

OPERATOR

OPERATION.

ETHERNET CHANNEL

UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-2¢ SOFTWARE

“"ESET LOGIN PSEUDO
“ESET LOGIN CONSOLE
“"ESET OPERATOR
PTYCON

GET SYSTEM:6--1-PTYCON.ATO

/LOG OPERATOR

JOB

XX OPERATOR

ENA

SYS:BATCON

GET

@#:
l:

SJ
SJ

@QLOG OPERATOR OPERATOR
QLOG OPERATOR OPERATOR

JOB

1 ON TTY1l6#

23-MAY-85

16:54:56

23-MAY-85

17:54:31

1l:

SsJ

JOB

2 ON TTY16l1

23-MAY-85 17:54:31,

LAST LOGIN

17:54:32,

LAST LOGIN

23-MAY-85

SJ
SJ

@:
1l:

@ENA

SJ
SJ
SJ
SJ
SJ
SJ
SJ

1l:
@:
@:
@:
@:
@:
@:

S$GET SYS:BATCON
$"ESET LOGIN PSEUDO
S$"ESET LOGIN CONSOLE
$"ESET OPERATOR
SPTYCON
PTYCON> GET SYSTEM:6-1-PTYCON.ATO
PTYCON> SILENCE

QENA

[From OPERATOR on line 162 to all:
SJ

PTYCON> W ALL

PTYCON>

OPR(0)

CONN OPR

OPERATOR

[CONNECTED TO SUBJOB

SYSTEM IN OPERATION]

OPR

g:0:1

OPR(9)]

Ethernet

Ethernet
the
You will receive the message concerning
the TOPS-24
installing
are
you
if
only
microcode
software on a

DECSYSTEM-20 with an

Ethernet.

NOTE

are
-These
MCBs.
SYSJOB no longer starts SETNOD and
See the DECnet-20/PSI-20 System
started by DECnet-2@¢.
Generation
Network
Manager's Guide and the DECnet-2@
more
for
manual
Procedures
Installation
and

information.

»Step 63:

STOP.

If you want to revert to Version 5.1,

follow the steps in Section A.3.

If you want to make Version 6.1 your primary monitor, follow the steps
in

Section

A.4.

If you want to make Version 6.1 your

steps

permanent

monitor,

the

Section A.S5.

Section A.A4.
If you have an RP2@ disk subsystem, follow the steps in
and load the
primary monitor
6.1 your
Version
steps make
These
front-end

files and DX2# microcode onto disk.

UPDATING

I
l

|
|
|
|
|

I
l
I
I
l
I

A.3

REVERTING

VERSION

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

SOFTWARE

5.1

If you must revert to running the TOPS-20 Version 5.1 software, follow
the steps in this section.
1If you want the UETP files when you revert
to Version 5.1, you must
restore
the
UETP
files
from
either
the
Version
5.1
Installation
tape
or
the latest backup tape.
Perform
Steps 1 through 7 to revert to TOPS-2¢ Version 5.1.
NOTE

If you
monitor

1installed
CI20
or
NIA20,
must be patched.
Follow the
Version 6.1 Beware file to do so.

.’.Step 1:

Installation-test

Job

OPERATOR

@QENABLE

‘Steg 2:

privileges

and

your

System,

enable
TOPS-2¢

your-password

perform

these
capabilities.

Monitor

dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss,

CONNECT

connected

PS:<SYSTEM>
to

the

6.1(6763)

Last

and

press

appropriate

the

dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss

RETURN

directory

procedures.

SCONNECT

PS:<SYSTEM>

procedures.

<RET>

Type

You must

TTY8

5.1
the

enable WHEEL or OPERATOR privileges.

You must be enabled and have
Follow the example to log in

@LOGIN

the
Version
directions in

key.
perform

these

<RET>

NOTE

Before

reverting
to
5-1-CONFIG.CMD file.

Version

sure

5.1,
examine
the
it contains a definition

of the logical name SYSTEM:, and that this
definition
does
not
include
the directory PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>.
If
the
SYSTEM:
definition
includes
the
directory

PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>

and

you

revert

Version

5.1,

MONITR.EXE.*

and

the

Version 5.1 monitor attempts to operate programs
that
do
not function properly in a Version 5.1 system.
If
the 5-1-CONFIG.CMD file does not contain a
definition
of
logical name SYSTEM:, insert the following command
into the file:
DEFINE

mp Step
3:

Type

RENAME

RETURN

|
|

PS:<SYSTEM>

5-1-MONITR.EXE.*

key.

In
Section
A.2.4
vyou
renamed
the
PS:<SYSTEM>5-1-MONITR.EXE.
If
you are

must

put

RENAME

this

monitor

back

command

so.

executed,

|
|
Y

SYSTEM:

the

system

prints

into
When

[OK]

Version
reverting
rename

message.

SRENAME 5-1-MONITR.EXE.* MONITR.EXE.* <RET>
5-1-MONITR.EXE.n => MONITR.EXE.n [OK]

5.1
monitor
to Version 5.1,

PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE.
the

press

has

been

Type

the
to
you
the

successfully

UPDATING

.’.Step 4:
|

THE

DECSYSTEM-2¢

SOFTWARE

Type "ECEASE +0@:01 and press the RETURN key.

To bring the system down in one minute, type
“ECEASE
+@#:01.
After
the
system
prints
"[Confirm],"
press
the
RETURN key.
The system
prints a list of messages.
The last message is "Shutdown complete."

<RET>

$“ECEASE +0@:081

TOPS2@ Shut down
[Confirm] <RET>

[System

going

[Timesharing

down
is

BEFORE

one

for

dd-mmm-yy

hh:mm:ss

minute!!

over]

OPERATOR

Shutdown

scheduled

- WAIT

ENTERING

FOR

THE

MESSAGE

COMMANDS

"Shutdown

PARSER

until

the

complete"

complete
NOTE

Do not proceed to
Step
"Shutdown complete."”

‘Step 5:

Type

system

prints

<CTRL/\>.

At the console terminal,
Command
Parser.
When
system prints the prompt

type <CTRL/\>
to
return
you
are at Command Parser
PAR>.

to
the
command

front-end
level, the

.’.Step_fii

stop

Type

the

SHUTDOWN

TOPS-2f

PAR>SHUTDOWN

and

press

monitor,

type

the

RETURN

key.

SHUTDOWN.

<RET>

**HALTED*
*

$DECSYSTEM-20

.’.Step

not

Reload

the

or the

Version

running

Version
5.1

5.1 monitor

using

the Version

5.1

floppies

disk.

To reload the Version 5.1 monitor
wusing
the
Version
5.1
floppies,
mount
System
Floppy A in floppy drive @, press the ENABLE and FLOPPY
buttons simultaneously, and answer the usual start-up questions.

To reload the Version 5.1 monitor using the Version
5.1
disk,
the
ENABLE
and
DISK
buttons
simultaneously,
and answer the
start-up

questions.
NOTE

|
|
|

You can
if
the
disk.

reload the Version 5.1 monitor
Version 5.1 front-end software

from disk
only
is still on the

press
usual

UPDATING

A.4

MAKING

THE

VERSION

THE

6.1

DECSYSTEM-20

MONITOR

THE

SOFTWARE

PRIMARY MONITOR

In case you are presently using the
Version
5.1
monitor,
you
must
rename
it
(Step 4 below) before copying the Version 6.1 monitor into
<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE.
You then
shut
down
the
system
and
1load
the
front-end software onto disk.

’Step l:

You must be enabled and have
Follow the example to log in

|
I
I
|

Installation-test

I
|
|
I

@LOGIN

privileges
and enable

System,

TOPS-20 Monitor

OPERATOR your-password

Job 5 on TTY8
@ENABLE

to perform
these
your capabilities.

procedures.

6.1(6763)

<RET>

dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss,

Last

<RET>

I’Eflep 2:

Type CONNECT PS:<SYSTEM> and press the RETURN key.

You must

be connected

procedures.

SCONNECT PS:<SYSTEM>

mp Step
3:

I
|
I
|
:
|

Skip to Step 5 if your
do
not need to rename

Type

perform

these

<RET>

present monitor is a Version 6.1 monitor.
You
your present monitor (Step 4).
This action was

Section A.2.4,

MONITR.EXE.*

Step

36.

5-1-MONITR.EXE.*

and

press

the

key.

To rename
When
the

and save
Version

prints

[OK]

RENAME

RETURN

the Version 5.1 monitor, type the
RENAME
command.
5.1
monitor
1is
successfully renamed, the system

message.

SRENAME MONITR.EXE.* 5-1-MONITR.EXE.* <RET>
MONITR.EXE.n => 5-1-MONITR.EXE.n [OK]
$

’Step 5:

Type COPY PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>montyp.EXE.* MONITR.EXE.*
the

directory

Proceed to Step 4 if you have reverted to a Version
5.1
system,
and
your
present
monitor is a Version 5.1 monitor.
You must rename this
monitor (Step 4) in case you ever need to revert to Version 5.1 again.

.’Emep

|
|

appropriate

STOP.

already performed

|
|

the

RETURN

and

press

key.

To copy the Version
6.1
monitor
into
PS:<SYSTEM>,
type
the
COPY
command.
(Montyp designates the type of monitor you have selected for
your system.)
When the copy is
successfully
completed,
the
system
prints

[OK]

message.

SCOPY PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>montyp.EXE.* MONITR.EXE.*
<NEW-SYSTEM>montyp.EXE.n => MONITR.EXE.n [OK]
$

<RET>

UPDATING

»Stepg 6:

Type

THE

"“ECEASE +0@:01

DECSYSTEM-2@

and

press

the

SOFTWARE

RETURN key.

To shut down the system in one minute, type "ECEASE +0@:01.
After the
system
prints
"[Confirm],"
press the RETURN key.
The system prints
several messages.
The last message is "Shutdown complete."
S"ECEASE +0@:01 <RET>
TOPS2@ Shut down scheduled
[Confirm] <RET>
[System

going

[Timesharing

down
is

Shutdown

dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss

one minute!!

over]

OPERATOR
BEFORE

for

- WAIT

FOR

ENTERING

THE

MESSAGE

COMMANDS

"Shutdown

PARSER

until

the

complete"

complete
NOTE

not

proceed

"Shutdown

mp Step 7:

Put

Step

Start at

front-end

the

Step

system

prints

complete."

Version

116,

software

6.1

front-end

in Chapter

disk.

software on disk.

of this guide,

put

the Version

6.1

NOTE

When the Version 6.1
front-end
software
1is
put
on
disk,
the
Version
5.1
front
end is destroyed.
In
order to use the Version 5.1 front-end software again,
you must reinstall it using the Version 5.1 floppies.

A.5

MAKING

The
steps
comfortable

|’»Steg l:
I
I
I

VERSION

this
the

with

6.1

MONITOR

section
Version

THE

PERMANENT MONITOR

should
be
software.

performed

when

you

feel

6.1

You must be enabled and have
Follow the example to log in

I
|
I
I

THE

Installation-test
@QLOGIN

Job 5
@ENABLE

privileges
and enable

System,

TOPS-2@ Monitor

OPERATOR your-password

TTY8

to perform
these
your capabilities.

procedures.

6.1(6763)

<RET>

dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss,

Last

<RET>

mp Step 2:

Type COPY PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>*.*.* PS:<SYSTEM>*.*.* and press the

RETURN

key.

To copy the directory <KNEW-SYSTEM> to
The system prints an [OK] message for

<SYSTEM>, type the
each file copied.

COPY command.

UPDATING

DECSYSTEM-20

SOFTWARE

PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>*
,* .,* PS:<SYSTEM>*.*
.* <RET>

SCOPY

THE

|’.Step

Type COPY PS: <NEW-SUBSYS>*,.*.* PS:<SUBSYS>*.*.*
RETURN

To copy the directory <KNEW-SUBSYS> to
The system prints an [OK] message for
SCOPY

.’.Step 4:
Connect

<SUBSYS>, type the
each file copied.

PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>*
. * * PS:<SUBSYS>*.*,*

Type

CONNECT

the

and press the

key.

PS:<SYSTEM>

and press

directory PS:<SYSTEM>

<RET>

the RETURN

by typing

COPY command.

the

key.

CONNECT command.

$SCONNECT PS:<SYSTEM> <RET>
$
NOTE

Use an editor
program
to
change
the
configuration
command
file.
You can use any editor of your choice
as long as you
accomplish
the
goal
of
each
step.
Steps

editor

5
through
program to

10
illustrate
the use of
change
the
configuration

the

EDIT
command

file.

.’.Step_éi

|
|
|
I

edit

the

EDIT 6-1-CONFIG.CMD and

6-1-CONFIG.CMD

file,

type

press the RETURN key.
the

EDIT command.

SEDIT 6-1-CONFIG.CMD <RET>
Edit:

PS:<SYSTEM>6~-1-CONFIG.CMD

mp Step
|

Type

Type P”:*
the

*p®:*

.’E&ep 7:
The

and

press the RETURN key.

entire configuration command

file,

type

<RET>

Type R line-number

and

press

the

RETURN

parameters
DEFINE

SYS:

DEFINE

SYSTEM:

PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>,PS:<SUBSYS>
PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>,PS:<SYSTEM>

key.

P":*,

UPDATING

must

replaced

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

SOFTWARE

DEFINE

SYS:

DEFINE

SYSTEM:

PS:<SUBSYS>
PS:<SYSTEM>

this,

use

the

EDIT

command

the

line

you

want

replace.

REPLACE,
or

followed

the

number

For
example,
type
R
and
the
1line
number
where
DEFINE
SYS:
PS:<KNEW-SUBSYS>,PS:<SUBSYS> is located; then press the RETURN key.
In
response, the system prints the line
number
you
entered
1in
the
R
command
and
waits
for
you
to
type
the replacement line.
In the
example, the parameter is located at line 504.
*R

500

<RET>

0o500

mp Step 8:

Type DEFINE SYSTEM:

PS:<SYSTEM>

and press the RETURN key.

To define SYSTEM: as PS:<SYSTEM>, type DEFINE SYSTEM:
PS:<SYSTEM> and
press
the
RETURN
key.
Also,
use
the
EDIT command DELETE, or D,
followed by the number of the line you want to delete, to
delete
any
line giving another definition of SYSTEM:.
#9500 DEFINE SYSTEM: PS:<SYSTEM>
1l Lines (00500/1) deleted

<RET>

.Ste‘g 9:

Repeat

DEFINE

with

the

SYSTEM:

the

SYSTEM:

definition.

PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>,
PS: <SYSTEM>

definition

DEFINE

mp Step 18:

Steps 7 and 8 for

SYSTEM:

PS:<SYSTEM>

Type EU and press the RETURN key.

When you finish making the
necessary
changes
to
command
file,
type
EU and press the RETURN key.
program and saves the file.
The system prints the
TOP5-2¢0
*EU

command

the
configuration
This ends the EDIT
file name
and
the

prompt.

<RET>

[PS:<SYSTEM>6-1-CONFIG.CMD.n]

$
»Step

1l:

Connect

Type CONNECT and press
back

your

$CONNECT <RET>
$

the RETURN key.

log-in directory by typing

CONNECT.

UPDATING THE

mpStep 12:

DECSYSTEM-20 SOFTWARE

Type DELETE PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>*.*.* and press the RETURN key.

To delete the files in the directory PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>, type the
DELETE
command.
The system prints an [OK] message for each file it deletes.
SDELETE

.}Step 13:

PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>*.#*,*

<RET>

Type DELETE PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>*.*.* and press the RETURN key.

To delete the files in the directory PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>, type the
DELETE
command.
The system prints an [OK] message for each file it deletes.
SDELETE

mpStep 14:
|

PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>*.*
,* <RET>

Type “ECEASE +@@:01 and press the RETURN key.

To shut down the system in one minute, type "ECEASE +¢@:01.
After the
system
prints "[Confirm]," press the RETURN key.
The system prints a
list of messages.

The last message

$"ECEASE +00:01 <RET>
TOPS2@ Shut down scheduled

is "Shutdown complete."

for dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss

[Confirm] <RET>

[System going

down

[Timesharing

in one minutell]

over]

OPERATOR - WAIT FOR THE MESSAGE
BEFORE
Shutdown

ENTERING COMMANDS

"Shutdown complete"

PARSER

until

the

complete
NOTE

not proceed

Step

"Shutdown complete."

mpStep 15:

system

prints

Type <CTRL/\>.

At the console terminal, type <CTRL/\>
to
return
to
the
front-end
Command
Parser.
When
vyou
are at Command Parser command level, the
system

prints

the

prompt

PAR>.

UPDATING

mpStep 16:
To

stop

Type
the

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

SHUTDOWN and press

TOPS-2@

PAR>SHUTDOWN

monitor,

type

the

SOFTWARE

RETURN

key.

SHUTDOWN.

<RET>

**HALTED**

$DECSYSTEM-20 not

.’Step

17:

Read

running

Chapter 5

To run the Version
5 of this guide.

6.1

of this guide.

software

from disk,

follow the

steps

NOTES

you

must

ever

floppies

and

revert

Version

5.1

Version

using

the

5.1,

vyou

Version

5.1

tapes.

If you
are
installing
any
unbundled
software,
in the appropriate
perform
the
steps
specified
installation guide that accompanies each
optional
software

.’Steg 18:

need

reinstall

Start

product.

timesharing.

Chapter

APPENDIX

POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20

new
a
for
output
terminal
console
the
contains
appendix
This
software on a DECSYSTEM-20 Model 20640.
TOPS-20¢
the
installation of

Iis
step
each
for
action
The
Step numbers are in the left column.
No error recovery procedures are included in this
BOLD.
in
printed
If you need help, refer to the appropriate step in Chapters
appendix.
2

through

Step

Operation

Read

the

listing

labeled

TOPS2d.BWR.

Ask your DIGITAL Field Service Representative

the

packs

are

formatted.

Power

up the

Label

the disk packs.

Mount the disk packs.

Check the CONTROLLER SELECT switches on the disk drive.

Mount System Floppy A in drive

Mount System Floppy B in drive 1.

Mount the

system.

tape on MTA#:.

Installation

Place the front-end HALT switch in the ENABLE position.

Set the switch register

Hold ENABLE and press the SWITCH REGISTER button.
RSX-20F VB15-21
[SY@:
[DX@:

redirected

12:06

to 0000087

(octal).

13-NOV-84

to DX@:]

mounted]
[DX1: mounted]
KLI -- VERSION VB15-15 RUNNING

KLI

-- ENTER DIALOG

KLI>YES

<RET>

KLl -- KL1@ S/N:
KLl

-- KL19¢

([NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]?

2102.,

HARDWARE

MODEL B,

ENVIRONMENT:

MOS MASTER OSCILLATOR
EXTENDED ADDRESSING
INTERNAL CHANNELS
CACHE

6@ HERTZ

disk

POCKET

Step

FOR

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

MICROCODE

RECONFIGURE

KLI>ALL

[YES,VERIFY,FIX,NO]?

<RET>

KLTI

VERSION

2.0[407]

CACHE

ALL

KLI

CONFIGURE

CACHES

KLI>ALL

<RET>

LOGICAL

MEMORY

ENABLED

MEMORY

[FILE,ALL,REVERSE,FORCE,YES,NO]?

CONFIGURATION

ADDRESS

SIZE

INT

TYPE

Poo00000

76K

MB2¢

LOAD

KLI>MTBOOT

BOOTSTRAP

CONTROLLER

[FILE,YES,NO,FILENAME]?

<RET>

-- WRITE

CONFIGURATION

KLI>NO

<RET>

KLI

BOOTSTRAP

LOADED

([FILE,ALL,YES,NO}?

<RET>

KLI

BOOT
20

KLX

KLI

RELOAD MICROCODE

KLI>YES

KLI

GUIDE

Operation
KLI

INSTALLATION

FILE

LOADED AND

[YES,NO]?

STARTED

V11.0(311)

MTBOOT>
/L <RET>
[BOOT: LOADING]

MTBOOT> /G143

[FOR

[OK]

<RET>

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

TYPE

"?"

TO ANY OF

THE

FOLLOWING

QUESTIONS.
]
22

YOU WANT

STRUCTURE?

HOW

MANY

WHICH

REPLACE

THE

YES

<RET>

DEFINE

THE

ARE

THIS

YOU WANT

PACKS

FILE

SYSTEM

1,-1,8

STRUCTURE:

SYSTEM

YES

<RET>

LOGICAL

PACK

YOU

WANT

THE

DEFAULT

SWAPPING

YOU

WANT

THE

DEFAULT

SIZE

FRONT

WANT

THE

DEFAULT

SIZE

BOOTSTRAP

THE

NAME

WHAT

YOU
IS

[STRUCTURE

SPACE?
END

YES
FILE

<RET>
SYSTEM?

"PS"

THIS

STRUCTURE?

SUCCESSFULLY

AREA?

PS:

YES

<RET>

DEFINED]

[PS MOUNTED]
$¥NO

SETSPD.

System

<RET>

YES

THE

STRUCTURE?

"CHANNEL,CONTROLLER,UNIT"

MOUNTED:

ENTER

restarting,
CURRENT

DATE

wait...
AND

TIME:

YOU

HAVE

ENTERED

WEDNESDAY,

THIS

CORRECT

(Y¥Y,N)

12-JUN-85

1630

12-JUNE-1985

<RET>

4:30PM,

<RET>

POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20

Stqg

Operation
WHY RELOAD? NEW <RET>

<SYSTEM>ACCOUNTS-TABLE.BIN NOT FOUND - ACCOUNT VALIDATION IS
DISABLED

DDMP

RUNNING

SYSJOB

<CTRL/C>
NO

EXEC

MX>GET FILE MTA@:
MX>GET FILE MTA@:
MX>START

<RET>

TOPS-2@ Command

processor 6.1(273)

<RET>

@ENABLE

44
45

DLUSER>DLOAD MTA@:

SRUN MTA@:

<RET>

DONE.

46
47
48
49

DLUSER>EXIT

SRUN MTA@:

<RET>

DUMPER>TAPE MTA@:

<RET>

. * * <RET>
* % PS:<SYSTEM>*
DUMPER>RESTORE PS:<*>*
Saveset ""SYSTEM FILES FOR TOPS-2¢ V6.1""
Loading files into
End of Saveset.

Total
Total

PS:<SYSTEM>

files restored:
pages restored:

n
n

* ,* PS:<SUBSYS>*.*.* <RET>
DUMPER>RESTORE PS:<*>*
Saveset ""SUBSYS FILES FOR TOPS-20 V6.1""
Loading

End

Total
Total

PS:<SUBSYS>

restored:
restored:

files
pages

Loading
of

Total
Total

n
n

files

into

PS:<SUBSYS>

Saveset.

restored:
restored:

files
pages

n
n

.,* <RET>
* * PS:<UETP.LIB>*.*
DUMPER>RESTORE PS:<*>*
Saveset ""UETP FILES FOR TOPS-28 Vé6.1""
Loading

End

Total
Total
53
54

into

* <RET>
* * PS:<SUBSYS>*..*
DUMPER>RESTORE PS:<*>*
Saveset ""GALAXY SUBSYS FILES FOR TOPS-20 V6.1""
End

files

Saveset.

files

into

PS:<UETP.LIB>

Tape.

restored:
restored:

files
pages

DUMPER>EXIT

<RET>

SUNLOAD MTA@:

<RET>

n
n

POCKET

Step

INSTALLATION

GUIDE

FOR

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

Operation

SINFORMATION DISK-USAGE PS:<*>

<RET>

PS:<ROOT-DIRECTORY>

-874 Pages assigned
+INF Working pages,

+INF

Permanent

pages

allowed

+INF

Permanent

pages

allowed

+INF

Permanent

pages

allowed

+INF

Permanent

pages

allowed

PS: <ACCOUNTS>

14 Pages assigned
+INF Working pages,
PS:<KNEW-SUBSYS>

Pages assigned

+INF Working

pages,

PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>

Pages assigned
Working pages,

+INF

PS: <OPERATOR>

@ Pages assigned
250 Working pages,

250

Permanent

pages

allowed

PS:<SPOOL>

@ Pages assigned
+INF Working pages,

+INF

Permanent

pages

allowed

pages,

+INF

Permanent

pages

allowed

1624 Pages assigned
+INF Working pages,

+INF

Permanent

pages

allowed

+INF

Permanent

pages

allowed

PS:<SUBSYS>

3111

Pages

assigned

+INF Working
PS:<SYSTEM>

PS: <SYSTEM-ERROR>

Pages

+INF

assigned
Working pages,

PS:<UETP>

@ Pages assigned
100000 Working pages,

100000

Permanent

pages

allowed

PS:<UETP.LIB>

1632
4000

Pages assigned
Working pages,

4000

Permanent

pages

allowed

PS:<UETP.RUN>

@ Pages assigned
500 Working pages,
Total
58056

56
57

of 5508 Pages
Pages free on

Permanent

file:

MAKDMP>EXIT

pages

PS:<SYSTEM>DUMP.EXE.1l

SCONNECT PS:<SYSTEM>

allowed

assigned, in 12 directories.
PS:, 17944 pages used.

SRUN PS:<SUBSYS>MAKDMP.EXE <RET>

MAKDMP>CREATE

[Dump
58

500

<RET>

2048

created]

<RET>

POCKET

Steg

INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE

DECSYSTEM-20

Operation

$SCOPY montyp.EXE.* MONITR.EXE.* <RET>
montyp.EXE.n => MONITR.EXE.n [OK]

STERMINAL NO RAISE

SCOPY TTY:
TTY:

<RET>

MONNAM.TXT

<RET>

MONNAM.TXT.1

Installation-test System
"2
SCOPY TTY: TAPNAM,.TXT <RET>
TTY:

TAPNAM.TXT.1l

Instal-tst

“Z

$
NOTE

Steps 64 through
92
illustrate
how
to
create
the
configuration
command
file
with
the
EDIT
editor
program.
You can use any editor of
your
choice,
as
long as you accomplish the goal of each step.

As you create the configuration command file, use
definitions
and
values that are appropriate for
system.
The file shown is only an example.
64
65

68
69

70
71

72
73
74

the
your

SCREATE 6-1-CONFIG.CMD <RET>
Input: PS:<SYSTEM>6-1-CONFIG.CMD.1

03100 ' Terminal Speeds <RET>
90200 ! Line 1 has input=9600 and output=96¢0 <RET>
3300 TERMINAL 1 SPEED 96¢0 <RET>
00400 ! Lines 2 to 20 have input and output=2400 <RET>
@3500 TERMINAL 2-20 SPEED 2440 <RET>
00609 | Lines 23 to 40 are shut off <RET>
@0709 TERMINAL 23-40¢ SPEED @ <RET>

g980@¢

Lines 21 and 22 are dialup lines <RET>

#1200
91300

DEFINE
DEFINE

#1400
#1500
#1600
#170¢
¢1800¢
#1900
22000
#2190
02200
@2300%
22400
§250%
02609
32709
228009
#2900

DEFINE SERR: PS:<SYSTEM-ERROR> <RET>
DEFINE DMP: PS:<directory> <RET>
DEFINE POBOX: PS: <RET>
DEFINE EDITOR: SYS:TV.EXE <RET>
MAGTAPE @ 24
TU45 <RET>
MAGTAPE 1 2601
TU77 <RET>
MAGTAPE 2 2002
TU71 <RET>
MAGTAPE 3 2003
TU79 <RET>
MAGTAPE 4 1500
TU72 <RET>
PRINTER @ LOWERCASE VFU SYS:NORMAL.VFU <RET>
PRINTER 1 VFU SYS:NORMAL.VFU <RET>
PRINTER ¢ LOWERCASE RAM SYS:LP96.RAM <RET>
PRINTER 1 RAM SYS:LP64.RAM <RET>
TIMEZONE 5 <RET>
DISABLE DIRECTORY-PARAMETER-SETTING <RET>
DISABLE ACCOUNT-VALIDATION <RET>

@0999 TERMINAL 21 REMOTE SPEED 9608 <RET>
#1093 TERMINAL 22 REMOTE AUTO <RET>
#1100 DEFINE NEW: PS:<NEW>,SY¥S: <RET>
OLD:
HLP:

PS:<OLD>,SYS:
SYS: <RET>

<RET>

POCKET

INSTALLATION GUIDE

FOR THE

DECSYSTEM-2§

Operation

Step

CAUTION

Before

you

obtain
the

can

use

from your

following

this

- STEP

performance

DIGITAL Field

information

about

feature,

you

must

Service Representative

your

hardware:

you have a KL1@-E
processor,
level 3 or later.

must

revision

If you have board M7772, it
must
level
E
and CS revision level F;
board

If your
take

be
at
version
or you may have

M7786.

hardware does
not
the
system

meet

these
default:

requirements,
DISABLE

FULL-LATENCY-OPTIMIZATION,

76
77
78

#3000
#3190

ENABLE FULL-LATENCY-OPTIMIZATION <RET>
ENABLE WORKING-SET-PRELOADING <RET>

#3200
#3390
@3400
#3500
#3600
937800

BIAS 6 <RET>
CREATE 1 .20 <RET>
CREATE 2 .40 <RET>
CREATE 3 .15 <RET>
BATCH-CLASS 4 <RET>
CREATE 4 .25 <RET>
CAUTION

- STEP

Do
not
enter
the
command
in
Step
80
into
the
configuration
command file until you have entered the
commands in Steps 78 and
79.
If
you
enable
<class
scheduling
before
creating classes, class scheduling
will not function properly.
#3808

ENABLE CLASS-SCHEDULING ACCOUNTS ALLOCATED
$39009 ARCHIVE-TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD 1825 <RET>
g4000¢ TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD 90 <RET>

#4100 ENABLE TAPE-DRIVE-ALLOCATION <RET>
#4200 TAPE-RECOGNITION-ERRORS UNLOAD <RET>
24300 CHANGE
9:00 WEEKDAYS <RET>
@4400 CHANGE 17:00 WEEKDAYS <RET>
04500 CHANGE
@:00 SATURDAY <RET>
24600 ALLOW
RP@6
1243 <RET>
94700 ALLOW
RP20
3327 <RET>
2480@ DAYLIGHT ON <RET>
94909 ENABLE
HANGUP-IF-LOGGED-IN <RET>
35000 ENABLE
HANGUP-IF-LOGGED-OUT <RET>
@5199 ENABLE SYSTEM-MESSAGE-LEVEL-# <RET>

#5200 ENABLE SYSTEM-MESSAGE-LEVEL-1
#5399 NODE DISNEY 8.164 <RET>
#5400

LAT-STATE

95500

86
87
88

*EU

OFF

<RET>

[PS:<SYSTEM>6-1-CONFIG.CMD.
1]

<RET>

POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20

Step

Operation

STYPE <SYSTEM>6-~1-CONFIG.CMD <RET>
! Terminal Speeds
! Line 1 has input=960@¢ and output=9600
TERMINAL

SPEED

9609

input and output=2400

Lines

2 to 20 have

Lines

23 to 40 are shut off

Line 21 and 22 are dialup lines

TERMINAL

2-20

TERMINAL

23-4¢0

TERMINAL

TERMINAL 22
DEFINE NEW:
DEFINE OLD:
DEFINE HLP:

SPEED

2400

SPEED

REMOTE

SPEED

300

REMOTE AUTO
PS:<NEW>,SY¥S:
PS:<OLD>,SYS:
SYS:

DEFINE SERR: PS:<SYSTEM-ERROR>
DEFINE DMP: PS:<directory>
DEFINE

POBOX:

PS:

DEFINE EDITOR: SY¥S:TV.EXE
MAGTAPE ¢ 24 TU45
MAGTAPE 1 20¢1 TU77
MAGTAPE 2 2002 TU71
MAGTAPE 3 2003 TU70

MAGTAPE

TIMEZONE

DISABLE

1500

TU72
LOWERCASE VFU SYS:NORMAL.VFU
VFU
VFU SYS:NORMAL.
LOWERCASE RAM SYS5:LP96.RAM
RAM SYS:LP64.RAM

@
1
¢
1

PRINTER
PRINTER
PRINTER
PRINTER

DIRECTORY-PARAMETER-SETTING

DISABLE ACCOUNT-VALIDATION

ENABLE FULL~-LATENCY-OPTIMIZATION
ENABLE WORKING-SET-PRELOADING
BIAS

CREATE

1 .20
CREATE 2 .40
CREATE 3 .15
BATCH-CLASS 4
CREATE 4 .25

ENABLE CLASS-SCHEDULING ACCOUNTS ALLOCATED
ARCHIVE-TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD 1825
TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD 9¢
ENABLE TAPE-DRIVE-ALLOCATION
TAPE-RECOGNITION-ERRORS UNLOAD
CHANGE 9:0¢ WEEKDAYS
CHANGE 17:90¢ WEEKDAYS
CHANGE @:0@ SATURDAY
ALLOW RP@6 1243
ALLOW RP2@ 3327
DAYLIGHT

ENABLE
ENABLE

HANGUP-IF-LOGGED-IN
HANGUP-IF-LOGGED-OUT

ENABLE SYSTEM-MESSAGE-LEVEL-#
ENABLE SYSTEM-MESSAGE-LEVEL-1
NODE DISNEY 8.164
LAT-STATE

OFF

SBUILD PS:<OPERATOR>

<RET>

[01d]
95

97
98

$SPASSWORD your-password

$SUSER-OF-GROUP 108 <RET>
$SIPCF <RET>

SS<RET>

<RET>

POCKET

Step

INSTALLATION

GUIDE

FOR

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

Operation

SBUILD PS:<REMARKS> <RET>
[New]

100

101
1g2

$S<RET>
SCONNECT PS:<SUBSYS>
SCREATE

Input:

LPFORM.INI

<RET>

<RET)>

PS:<SUBSYS>LPFORM.INI.1

193

PP10@
@320%

NORMAL/BANNER:2/HEADER:2/TRAILER:2 <RET>
NARROW/BANNER:2/HEADER:2/TRAILER:2/WIDTH:72

104

90300

*EU

<RET>

[PS:<SUBSYS>LPFORM.
INI.1]

NOTE

Perform Steps 185 through 114 only if you are using an
RP@7
disk pack for your system structure.
Otherwise,

continue

Step

115.

TCP/IP

Installations

If you are installing TCP/IP-20¢ and are using an
RP@7
disk
pack
as the system structure, perform Steps 105
through
114.
Otherwise,
proceed
to
Appendix
c,
Section C.3, Step 2.
195

SRUN CHECKD

106

CHECKD>CREATE

197
108

Enter

How many

units

109

DECIMAL

Channel,

unit

1,-1,0

alias:

¢:

<RET>
FESYS

FESYS

110
111

Number

pages

Number

pages

112

Owner

113

114

CHECKD>EXIT

950

<RET>

<RET>
this

structure:

Controller,

and

<RET>

Unit

numbers

<RET>
to
to

allocate
allocate

for
for

swapping?
the Front

for

logical

7635 <RET>
End File System?

<RET>
name?

this

OPERATOR

system

<RET>

structure

for

startup? NO

<RET>

$
TCP/IP

Installations

If you are installing TCP/IP-20, proceed
to
Appendix
C,
Section
C.3, Step 2.
Do not create the front-end
file system until you complete Steps 1 through
23
in
Appendix C.
‘

115

$“ECEASE NOW <RET>
KL2192

Will

[Confirm]

shut

[Timesharing

IMMEDIATELY

over]

OPERATOR
BEFORE

Shutdown

dqown

<RET>

WAIT

ENTERING

complete

FOR

THE

COMMANDS

MESSAGE
TO

"Shutdown

PARSER

completeTM

POCKET

INSTALLATION GUIDE

FOR

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

Operation
Make

sure

that

the

correct

floppy disks

are mounted.

<CTRL/\>
PAR>SHUTDOWN

<RET>

**HALTED**

$DECSYSTEM-2@
119

Set

120

Hold

the

switch

ENABLE

running

000003

and

press

the

VB15-21

12:00

13-NOV-84

[SYP:

redirected

[DX@:

mounted]

[DX1:

mounted]

RSX-2¢F

121
123

not

SWITCH

(octal).

DX@:]

<CTRL/\>
PAR%RUN

124

INI>DB#:

125

INI

<RET>

126

PAR%RUN

127

MOU>DB@:

128

MOU>"Z

129

PARSRUN

130

UFD>DB#: [5,5]
<CTRL/\>

MOU

<RET>

-- MOUNT

COMPLETE

131
132

PAR%RUN

UFD

PIP

<RET>

!Wait

10 seconds before proceeding

<RET>

134

PIP>DB@s*
,*; *=DX@:z* . *;* ,DX1:*.%;*
PIP>"Z

135

PAR%RUN

136

RED>DB@:=SY@:
<CTRL/\>

133

<RET>

137
138

PAR$RUN

RED

SAV

<RET>

!Wait

5 seconds before

<RET>

SAV>

139

Set

the

149

SAV>SY@:/WB <RET>
[DB@: dismounted]
[DX@: dismounted]
[DX1: dismounted]
RSX-2@0F

[SY@:

switch

VB15-21

12:19

zero

(4).

13-NOV-84

redirected to DB@:]

[DB@:

mounted]

141

Store

the

142

Mount

System

floppy disks
Floppy

A and

C on drive

proceeding

POCKET

Step

INSTALLATION GUIDE

FOR

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

Operation

143
144
145

MOU>DX@:

146

MOU>"2

147

PARSRUN

148

PIP>DB@:*
,*; *=DX@:* ,*; * <RET>
PIP>DB@:/LI <RET>

PAR$RUN
MOU

MOU

<RET>

MOUNT

COMPLETE

DIRECTORY DB#g: [5,5]
12:17

F11ACP.TSK; 1521

77.

TKTN.TSK;1521

OO0

13-NOV-84

13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84

MOU. TSK; 1521

KLX.MCB; 400

55.

13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84

HALT.CMD;1

BOOT.EXB; 11306

46.

BF16N1.Al1;1

BF64N1.Al11;1
SB@A.CMD;1

1.
2.

SB1.CMD;1

CLOCK.CMD;1

EBUS.CMD; 1

DEX.CMD;1

KPALV.CMD; 1

TIMEO.CMD;1

FMPAR.CMD; 1

CRAM.CMD; 1

DRAM.CMD; 1

MTBOOT.EXB; 11306

49.

LOOP.CMD; 1

PARSER. TSK; 785

71.

KLDISC.TSK;1521

KLRING.TSK;1521

LOGXFR.TSK;1521

1a.

MIDNIT.TXK;1521

SETSPD.TSK; 1521

KLI.TSK;1515

73.

T20ACP.TSK;1521

BOO.TSK;1521

19.

COP.TSK;1521

DMO.TSK;1521

INI.TSK;1521

23.

PIP.TSK; 1521

56.

RED.TSK; 1521

SAV.TSK;1521

23.

UFD.TSK;1521

Qo000 00000000000

149

PIP

13-NOV-84

12: 04
12:04
12:04
12:05
12: 05
12:85
12:05
12:05
12:05
12:06
12:06
12:06
12:06
12:96
12:06

12:06
12:07
12:07
12:07
12:07
12:07
12:08

13-NOV-84

12:08

13-NOV-84

12:08

13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84

12:08

13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84

13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84

13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84

12:08
12:08
12:09
12:09
12:09
12:09
12:09
12: 09
12:10
12:10

12:10
12:10

ZAP.TSK;1521

38.

RSX2@F.SY¥S;1521

59.

RSX20F.MAP; 1521

154.

13-NOV-84

12:10
12:16

RP2DBT.EXB;11306
RP2MBT.EXB; 11306

69.
60.

13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84

12:16
12:16

TOTAL

961.

BLOCKS

13-NOV-84
13-NOV-84

41.

FILES

POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20

SteE

150

Operation

PIP>"Z
<CTRL/\>
PAR$RUN DMO <RET>

151
152

DMO>DX@:

153

DMO>"Z

<RET>

DMO -- DISMOUNT COMPLETE

<CTRL/\>
PARS%

154

Store

floppy

RP20

Disks

If you have an RP2@ disk subsystem, perform Steps
Otherwise, continue at Step 164.
through 159.

156

RP2@¢ Disk Controller

the
for
controller
8@09-2
It is necessary that the
Refer to the 8000
RP2¢ disk subsystem be in 370 mode.
2,
Volume
Manual,
Reference
Controller Maintenance
page U210, for information on switch settings.
155

Be sure that the central processor

156

PARSRUN

157

PIP

is stopped.

<RET>

PIP>DBG:[5;5]BOOT.EXB=DB@:[5,5]RP2DBT.EXB <RET>

g%g;?gfl:[5,5]MTBOOT.EXB=DBQ:[5,5]RP2MBT.EXB <RET>

159

<CTRL/\>
PAR%

is stopped.

160

Be sure that the central processor

161

Hold ENABLE and

press the DISK button.

RSX-2@0F VB15-21

12:19 13-NOV-84

[SY?P:

redirected

[DB@:

mounted]

DBO:]

KLI -- VERSION VB15-15 RUNNING
KLI -- KL1@ S/N: 210¢2., MODEL B, 60 HERTZ
KLI -- KL19 HARDWARE ENVIRONMENT:
MOS MASTER OSCILLATOR
EXTENDED ADDRESSING
INTERNAL CHANNELS
CACHE

KLI -- MICROCODE VERSION 2.4([407] LOADED
KLI -- % NO FILE - ALL CACHE BEING CONFIGURED
KLI

-- ALL CACHES

ENABLED

KLI -- % NO FILE - ALL MEMORY BEING CONFIGURED

POCKET

Step

INSTALLATION

GUIDE

FOR

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

Operation
LOGICAL MEMORY CONFIGURATION.
ADDRESS

SIZE

1INT

TYPE

00000008

768K

MF20

KLI

CONFIGURATION

KLI

BOOTSTRAP

BOOT

LOADING]

FILE

LOADED

BOOTSTRAP

WRITTEN

AND

System

([OK]

ENTER

CI2@

restarting,
CURRENT

DATE

MICROCODE

TIME:

YOU

HAVE

ENTERED

WEDNESDAY,

THIS

CORRECT

(Y¥,N)

164

WHY

RELOAD?

CHECKD?

RUNNING

DDMP

SYSJOB

6A(2@)

[KNILDR:
CHANNEL

[OK]

12-JUN-85

1112

11:12AM,

<RET>

NOT

FOUND

- ACCOUNT

STARTED AT

12-JUN-85

MICROCODE

VERSION

1112

1(162)

INTO

*hkkkk

11:12:39

TGHA

4(9¢)

dhkkkk

RUN

SYS:INFO

RUN

SYS:MAPPER

RUN

SYS:ORION

RUN

SYS:QUASAR

RUN

SYS:MOUNTR

RUN

SYS:MAILER

RUN

SYS:LPTSPL

RUN

SYS:LPTSPL

RUN

SYS:CDRIVE

RUN

SYS:SPRINT

JOB

# /LOG

OPERATOR

ENA

~“ESET
“ESET
~ESET

PTYCON

GET

JOB

SYSTEM:6-1-PTYCON.ATO

/LOG

OPERATOR

ENA
GET

VALIDATION

<RET>

12-JUN-85

<RET>

<SYSTEM>ACCOUNTS-TABLE.BIN
IS DISABLED
RUN

1.08(705)]

wait...
AND

163

165

STARTED

MOUNTED]

[IPALOD:

l62

FILE

190

V11.0(311)

[BOOT:

[PS

CONTROLLER

SYS:BATCON

@LOG

OPERATOR

@LOG

OPERATOR

B-12

OPERATION.

ETHERNET

POCKET

Step

167

168

169

GUIDE

FOR

THE

DECSYSTEM-2¢

Operation

8J
SJ

@:
1l:

Job 1
Job 1

on
on

TTY206
TTY206

dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss,
dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss,

@ENA

1l:

QENA

SJ
85J
SJ
SJ

@:
@:
@:
@:

SGET SYS:BATCON
$"ESET LOGIN PSEUDO
S$"ESET LOGIN CONSOLE
$"ESET OPERATOR
SPTYCON

PTYCON>

GET SYSTEM:6-~1-PTYCON.ATO

PTYCON>

SILENCE

[From

166

INSTALLATION

OPERATOR on

line

PTYCON>

OPR(Q)

PTYCON>

CONN

218

all:

SYSTEM

Last
Last

never
never

OPERATION]

W ALL
OPERATOR

OPR

P:0:1

OPR

SJ
@:
[CONNECTED TO SUBJOB OPR(#)]
£CTRL/C>
Installation-test System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6.1(6763)
QLOGIN OPERATOR your-password <RET>
Job 4 on TTY5 dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss, Last Login dd-mmm-yy
hh:mm:ss

@ENABLE <RET>
$OPR <RET>
OPR>SHOW STATUS

TAPE~DRIVE /ALL

<RET>

OPR>

15:58:35

Drive

State

MTAQ:

Drive

Status--

Volid

Reqg#

Job#

DEK

MTAl:

MTA2:

Yes

Use

AVR:

Yes,

LARRUP

Write:

Yes,

Unlabeled

Write:

Yes,

Unlabeled

Loaded

AVR:
MTA3:

Yes,

Unloaded
AVR:

Yes

17¢

OPR>SET

171

Enter text and terminate with "2
INSTALLING OPTIONAL SOFTWARE "2

User

Unloaded
AVR:

TAPE-DRIVE MTA@:

UNAVAILABLE

<RET>

OPR>

~- Tape
MTA@: set

——

SJ
83

@:
@:

—

15:59:07
53

——

~-~-Tape

15:59:07
-—- Tape Drive Set Unavailable -MTA@: set unavailable for assignment by MOUNTR

172

OPR>EXIT

173
174

SASSIGN MTA@:
$DUMPER <RET>

175

Drive Set Unavailable -unavailable for assignment by MOUNTR

<RET>

DUMPER>TAPE MTA@:

<RET>

DUMPER>

176

Mount

the

software

tape.

B-13

POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20

Step

177
178

Operation

* <RET>
% * PS:<OPERATOR>*.,*
DUMPER>RESTORE PS:<*>*
DUMPER TAPE # 1, ""DOCUMENTATION FILES FOR TOPS-20 V6.1""
Loading
End

Total
Total
179

<RET>

DUMPER>REWIND

files

into

PS:<OPERATOR>

Saveset.

files
pages

restored:
restored:

n
n

DUMPER>RESTORE PS:<*>*
% % PS:<SUBSYS>*.*
,* <RET>
DUMPER TAPE # 1, ""SOURCE FILES FOR TOPS-20 V6.1""
Loading files into
of Saveset.

PS:<SUBSYS>

End

Total
Total

files
pages

restored:
restored:

n
n

DUMPER>

180

Restore

the

language sources

181

Restore

the GALAXY sources

182
183

DUMPER>EXIT

(optional).

<RET>

SUNLOAD MTA@:

<RET>

$
184

Dismount the software tape

185

Return to

Step

176

and store

restore

it.

files

from

other

can

skip

tapes

(optional).
186

SDEASSIGN MTA@:
$

<RET>

NOTE

If you performed

Steps

188

and

189

Steps 166 through 186,
and

start at

Step

188

189

@LOGIN OPERATOR your-password

Installation-test

System,

190.

you

TOPS-2¢ Monitor 6.1(6763)
<RET>

Job n on TTYn dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss,

Last

hh:mm:ss

<RET>
STAKE PS:<UETP.LIB>SET-UP.CMD <RET>

@ENABLE
199

[New]

191
192

End of <UETP.LIB>SET-UP.CMD.1
SCONNECT PS:<UETP.RUN> <RET>
SRUN UETP.EXE <RET>

193

UETP>TAKE

[dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss

VERIFY.CMD

User

UETP>ENABLE VERIFY/CYCLE:1
(hh:mm:ss

Environment Test

Package

]

<RET>

!Verify that the correct software

ENABLE COMPLETED]

POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20

Step

Operation

UETP>BEGIN
!
[hh:mm:ss
BEGIN COMPLETED]

installed

UETP>DEFAULT/CYCLE:00:15

[(hh:mm:ss
UETP>ENABLE

DEFAULT COMPLETED]
RANCBL

[hh:mm:ss

ENABLE COMPLETED]

UETP>ENABLE

RANFOR
ENABLE COMPLETED]

[hh:mm:ss

UETP>ENABLE

[hh:mm:ss

MTAQ

ENABLE COMPLETED]

UETP>STATUS

[dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss]

Test

name

Depth

Status

VERIFY VER

Running

RANFOR VER
MTAQ
VER

Enabled
Enabled

RANCBL VER

Cycle

Times

)

@ dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss

@:15
@:15

]
]

/]
/]

)
@

Enabled

START VERIFY
END
VERIFY

run

@:15

Error

Start

count limit time
@

)

9:43:33
19:14:53
NOTE

If any messages appear between the START
message
and
the
END
message,
there
are errors in the files you
Do not proceed any further.
received.

194

Mount a magnetic

tape on the drive you want to

UETP>ENABLE MTAn

<RET>

[hh:mm:ss
195

UETP>BEGIN

[hh:mm:ss

ENABLE COMPLETED]
<RET>

BEGIN COMPLETED]

UETP>

START
START
START
END
END
END

RANCBL
RANFOR
MTAQ
RANCBL
RANFOR
MTAQ

hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss

test.

POCKET

INSTALLATION

GUIDE

FOR

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

Operation

Step

196

[Al]l

tests

complete

[dd=-mmm-yy

hh:mm:ss]

Test

Depth

Status

processor

Cycle

name

197

2102]

Times

Error

run

count

limit

VERIFY

VER

Ended

RANCBL

VER

Ended

g:15

dd-mmm-yy

RANFOR

VER

Ended

@:15

dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss

MTAQ

VER

Ended

@:15

dd-mmm-yy

from

UETP.

Proceed

optional
199

Step

282

software,

UETP>ENABLE

[hh:mm:ss

EXIT

product-name

ENABLE

UETP>ENABLE

[hh:mm:ss

proceed

<RET>

BEGIN

you

want

hh:mm:ss
test

199.

<RET>

product-name

[hh:mm:ss

Step

hh:mm:ss

COMPLETED]

ENABLE

UETP>BEGIN

dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss

<RET>

COMPLETED]

UETP>

200

STATUS

<RET>

[dd-mmm-yy
Test

hh:mm:ss]

Depth

Status

Cycle

name

Times

Error

run

count

limit

VERIFY

VER

Ended

)]

RANCBL

VER

Running

@:15

)

dd-mmm-yy

RANFOR

VER

Queued

MTAQ

VER

Queued

@:15
@:15

]
]

]
7}

dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss
dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss

dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss

hh:mm:ss

NOTE

there

ERROR
are

201

COUNT,

completed,

STATUS

number
print

other
the

find

than

under

ERROS.LOG

out

what

file,

caused

the
when

the

heading
the

tests

error.

<RET>

[dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss]
Test

Depth

Status

Cycle

name

202

Times

Error

Start

run

count

limit

time

VERIFY

VER

Ended

)

]

RANCBL

VER

Ended

g:15

RANFOR

VER

Ended

dd-mmm-yy

@g:15

dd-mmm-yy

MTAQ

VER

Ended

@:15

EXIT

<RET>

dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss

dd-mmm-yy

hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss

POCKET

Step

INSTALLATION

GUIDE

FOR

THE

DECSYSTEM-20

Operation

203

$TAKE
[01d]
[01d]

204
205

SDEASSIGN MTA@:
SOPR <RET>

206

OPR>SET

End

<UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD

<RET>

<UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP,.CMD.
3

<RET>

OPR>

TAPE-DRIVE

MTA@:

AVAILABLE

<RET>

OPR>

hh:mm:ss

~—MTA@:

OPR>

hh:mm:ss

MTAQ:

OPR>

207

OPR>EXIT

<RET>

$
208

Start

Tape
set

timesharing.

Drive

Set

available

Available -for assignment

by MOUNTR

-- Tape Drive Set Available -set available for assignment by

MOUNTR

APPENDIX

INSTALLING TCP/IP-20

Perform the steps in this appendix ONLY if you are
using
the
TCP/IP
(Transmission
Control
Protocol/Internet
Protocol)
network software
supported by DIGITAL.
Most of the configuration information
required
to
utilize
the TCP/IP software is available from the ARPANET Network
Information Center (NIC) and the
ARPANET
Network
Operations
Center
(NOC) .
Sites
that
are
not
connected to the ARPANET networks must
develop their own configuration information.
Follow this appendix to

C.l1

Install

Customize

Utilize

TCP/IP

the monitor
the

the

data

and

asscociated

software.

files.

customized data

files.

INSTALLATION TOOLS

You need software packages QT@#23 and
QT@99
to
install
TOPS-2¢
TCP/IP software on a DECSYSTEM-2@.
These packages contain
®

The

TOPS-2@ RSX-20F

Version

15-21

System

Floppy A.

The

TOPS-20 RSX-2@F

Version

15-21

System

Floppy B.

The

TOPS-2@ RSX-2@F Version

15-21

System

Floppy C.

The

TOPS-2@ Version 6.1

The

TOPS-2@ Version 6.1 Distribution

The

TCP/IP-20 Version 4.0 Distribution

Installation tape.

Refer to Chapter 1 of this guide
for
disks and the TOPS-20 Installation and
The

TCP/IP-20 Version

savesets

C.2

recorded

4.8

1600

DUMPER

tape.

tape

format.

Saveset

Savesets 2 through 4 contain the TCP/IP
source files, and utilities and tools.

contains documents about

RESTORING THE TOPS-2¢ BUNDLED SOFTWARE

Perform

Step

restore

the

FROM

TOPS-2@ software.

c-1

tape.

information
about
Distribution tapes.

Distribution

bpi

and

contains

the

floppy

four

DUMPER

TCP/IP software.
monitors,

TAPE

data

and

INSTALLING

mpStep 1:

TCP/IP-20

Create the TOPS-20 file system and the configuration

command

file.
You

will

system

and

restoring
the

installation,
If

you

are

you will

doing

restore

the

command

file.

non-TCP/IP monitor

configuration

choose

new

Version

command

files

from

read
tape

If you are doing an update installation,
through
A.2.6,
Steps
1 through 47, to
and edit the configuration command file.

C.3
To

RESTORING
restore

following

Use

2000

150

the

pages

command

Steps

4.8

directory

the

order to
you

the

chapters
and

the
the

file
TCP/IP

create

through

the

configuration

read

Appendix A, Sections A.1l
restore the Version 6.1 files

TAPE

Distribution

there

are

tape,

you

need

the

<NEW-SYSTEM>.

<NEW-SUBSYS>.

directory <TCPIP-SOURCES>,

DIRECTORY dev:<directory>

directories
through

directory <SUBSYS>

the

restore the
BUILD

must

SBUILD

each

directory.

or delete
to

restore

1If

and

expunge

the

TCP/IP

directory

determine

necessary,

some

move

you

how
some

files.

Distribution

tape.

fourth
saveset
on
the
TCP/IP
Distribution
the directory PS:<TCPIP-SOURCES>.
Follow the

so.

PS:<TCPIP-SOURCES>

<RET>

[New]

SSWORKING 1500 <RET>
S$SPERMANENT 1500 <RET>
S$S<RET>
$

Type

end

Type BUILD PS:<TCPIP-SOURCES> and press the RETURN key.

tape,

’Step'_:j_:_

create

<OPERATOR>.

directory

INFORMATION

pages

other

DISTRIBUTION
Version

the

pages

example

create.

files

mpsStep 2:

TCP/IP-20

the

space:

1500

free

TCP/IP

must

many

the

disk

THE

you

Near

TCP/IP monitor.

installation,
6.1

file.

Type

DUMPER

and

press

start

the

DUMPER

SDUMPER <RET>

DUMPER>

the

RETURN

program.

key.

[

INSTALLING TCP/IP-20

mp Step
4:
I
|
I
I

To tell
example

Type TAPE MTAn:

DUMPER which tape drive you are
uses MTA@:
as the tape drive.

DUMPER>TAPE

Mount

the

Type

sure

that

Type

the

tape

the

RETURN

tape drive.

the

is at

its beginning,

sure

put

disk

key.

type

REWIND.

<RET>

DUMPER>SUPERSEDE ALWAYS

press

the RETURN key.

<RET>

DUMPER>
NOTE

Give the DUMPER command FILES just before the
RESTORE
command
if
you
want
the
system
to print the file
specification of
each
file
it
restores.
To
stop
printing
each
file specifications, give the NO FILES
command after the current RESTORE command finishes.

Type RESTORE PS:<*>*.*.*

Type

the

directory

PS:<OPERATOR>*.*.*

and

press

the

key.

RESTORE command

restore the

documentation

files

the

press

the

<OPERATOR>.

DUMPER>RESTORE PS:<*>*
% ,* PS:<OPERATOR>*
,* ,* <RET>
Saveset ""DOCUMENTATION FOR TCP/IP-2@ V4.0""
Loading files into PS:<OPERATOR>

End

Total

files

restored:

Total

pages

restored:

Saveset.

DUMPER>

»Steg_:

Type
RETURN

The

tape.

press

|
[
[
|
|

|
|

SUPERSEDE ALWAYS and

RETURN

|
|

MTAn:.

Type the command SUPERSEDE ALWAYS to tell DUMPER to supersede
file with a magnetic tape file of the same file name and type.

mpStep 8:

TAPE

DUMPER>

.gl:_e_]g 7:

TCP/IP Distribution

REWIND and

DUMPER>REWIND

|
I
|
I
|
|
|
[
I
|
|
|
|

type

<RET>

Mount the TCP/IP Distribution
the drive online.

.’,Steg 6:

I
I
I

MTA@:

using,

DUMPER>

»Step__ 5:
|
|

and press the RETURN key.

RESTORE

PS:<*>*.*,*

PS:<SYSTEM>*
,* ,*

and

key.

Type the RESTORE command to restore
the
monitor,
data,
and
files
to
the
directory
<SYSTEM>.
If
you
are
doing
an
1installation, restore the files to <NEW-SYSTEM>.

system
update

INSTALLING TCP/IP-20

DUMPER>RESTORE

Saveset

Loading
End

PS:<*>%*
* *

""SYSTEM

files

FILES

into

FOR

PS:<SYSTEM>*.,*
#

TCP/IP-20

<RET>

V4.4""

PS:<SYSTEM>

Saveset.

Total

files

restored:

Total

pages

restored:

DUMPER>

W) Step 10:

Type RESTORE
RETURN

|
:

Restore the system files to the
an update installation, restore

|
|
|
|

files

restored:

Total

pages

restored:

RETURN

press

the

are

doing

and

press

<RET>

the

key.

utilities

and

tools

files

the

directory

<TCPIP-SOURCES>.

DUMPER>RESTORE PS:<*>*
% * PGS:<TCPIP-SOURCES>*
_ * * <RET)>
Saveset ""SOURCE FILES FOR TCP/IP-20 V4.0 UTILITIES AND TOOLS""
Loading files into PS:<TCPIP-SOURCES>
End of Saveset.

|
|
|
|
I

DUMPER>

.’.Step

12:

Type

EXIT

Type

Total

files

restored:

Total

pages

restored:

EXIT and press

end

DUMPER>EXIT

.’Eflep

13:

Type

unload

the

You can

UNLOAD MTAn:
tape

Dismount
now

DUMPER

the

RETURN

key.

program.

<RET>

SUNLOAD MTA@:
$

‘Step 14:
|

<SUBSY¥S>.
If you
to <NEW-SUBSYS>.

Type RESTORE PS:<*>*
. *.* PS:<TCPIP-SOURCES>*.*.*

Restore

|
|
|
|

and

DUMPER>

the

|
|
I

directory
the files

Total

mpStep 11:

PS:<SUBSYS>*.*.*

DUMPER>RESTORE PS:<*>*
* * PS:<KSUBSYS>*
. * ,*
Saveset ""SUBSYS FILES FOR TCP/IP-20 V4.g""
Loading files into PS:<SUBSYS>
End of Saveset.

I
I
|
I
I

PS:<*>*.*.*

Key.

remove

from

the

and press
tape

drive,

the

RETURN

type

UNLOAD MTAn:.

<RET>

the

TCP/IP Distribution

the

tape

from

the

C-4

tape

key.

tape.
drive.

INSTALLING

C.4

CUSTOMIZING A

Follow Steps
(formerly

» Step
|
|
|
I
|
|
|
|
|
I
|
I

DATA

through

TCP/IP-20

FILE

customize

the

file

INTERNET.ADDRESS

SITE-ADDRESS.TXT).

15:

Type

CONNECT

PS:<SYSTEM>

and

press

the

To provide the TCP/IP software with the data
add or change three system files that reside
connected to the appropriate directory to do

SCONNECT PS:<SYSTEM>

RETURN

key.

it needs to run, you must
in <SYSTEM>.
You must be
so.

<RET>

$
NOTE

The following steps create a file with the EDIT editor
program.
You can use any editor you wish, as long as
you accomplish the goal of each step.

» Step

16:

Type

CREATE

INTERNET.ADDRESS

and

press

the

RETURN

key.

The

INTERNET.ADDRESS file should contain the addresses of your TOPS-20
system for each defined interface.
TOPS-20 supports three interfaces:

Use

AN20

KLNI

KLIPA

the

CREATE

SCREATE
Input:
00100

» Step
|
|
|
I
|
I
|
|
|
|
|
|
I
I
I
I
|
I
|
|

17:

You must
network
in

(the
(the

CI,

command

NI,

Computer

create

INTERNET.ADDRESS

Network

Interconnect)

the

file

INTERNET.ADDRESS.

<RET>

PS:<SYSTEM>INTERNET.ADDRESS.1

Enter

the

internet

addresses

for

your

site.

be sure that your INTERNET.ADDRESS file contains the
correct
and
host numbers.
Contact the NIC or the NOC for assistance

determining

Here

Ethernet

is an

your

network

example of what

addresses.

you should

place

your

INTERNET.ADDRESS

file:

AN20#0, 10
IPNI#0,192
IPCI#0,192

0
5
5

@
6
5

79,NCP,PACKET-SIZE:1004,DEFAULT,
PREFERRED
1,PACKET-SIZE:1500
4,PACKET-SIZE:632

The PACKET-SIZE keyword
that can be transmitted
The DEFAULT keyword
communicating
with

specifies the maximum
over the interface.

specifies
a target

size

packet

(in

bytes)

which
internet
address
to
use
when
host that is not on a directly connected

network.

The PREFERRED keyword specifies which interface is
preferred
target host is on more than one directly connected network.

when

INSTALLING

Obtain the correct network and
packet-size
1in
the
example.

parameters
parameters
Use

the

TCP/IP-2§

host numbers from
You
should
not

the
NIC,
have
to

in the example, except the network address,
are set for optimum network accessibility.

line

starting

with

AN2g#@0

you

are

Use
change

the
any

all

the

connecting

the

ARPANET.

Use

the

line

with

IPNI##

you

are

connecting

the

Ethernet

Use

the

line

with

IPCI#0

you

are

connecting

the

CI.

appropriate

for

your

Enter the
the file.

internet

addresses

$0l00 AN26#6, 106
00200 IPNI#6,192
00300 IPCI#0,192
00400

Step

To
EU

18:

Press

save your
and press

g0400
*EU

the

6
5
5

@
6
5

ESCAPE

that

are

(NI).

site

into

79,NCP,PACKET-SIZE:1004,DEFAULT,
PREFERRED
1,PACKET-SIZE:1500 <RET>
4,PACKET-SIZE:632 <RET>

key.

INTERNET.ADDRESS
the RETURN key.

Type EU

file,

and

press

the

ESCAPE

RETURN

key.

<RET>

key.

Then

type

<RET>

[PS:<SYSTEM>INTERNET.ADDRESS.1]

C.5

CHOOSING

this

A MONITOR

time,

2060-MONBIG.EXE

monitor

that most

you
or

are

running

closely meets

your

The three TCP/IP monitors you can
installations) or in <NEW-SYSTEM>

AN-MONBIG. EXE

2060-MONMAX.EXE.

TOPS-20
You

should

system's

choose from
(for update

monitor,
now

100

jobs
lines
LAT lines

are in <SYSTEM>
installations).

30 pseudo-terminals
49 NVTs (Network Virtual
4MEG of memory
8 magnetic tape drives
2 line printers
1l card reader

120

million
three
two

10000

words
RP@6,

RA6@,

pages

for

disk

storage

RPP7,

three

RA8]l)

new

DECnet

Terminals)

one
one

TCP/IP

(for

without

swapping

requirements.

A big TCP/IP timesharing
monitor
support.
This monitor supports:

128
19

either

select

per

space

(six

RP2@

RP@4,

spindles,

structure

INSTALLING TCP/IP-20

A large TCP/IP
timesharing
monitor
support.
This monitor supports:

with

DECnet

—

C—

—

AN-MONDCN. EXE

—

jobs
lines
LAT lines
pseudo-terminals

———

NVTs

magnetic tape drives
line printers

card

—

———

of memory

8
2

reader

——

—

120 million words of
disk
three
RP@6,
one RP@F7,

two

RA6#,

pages

for

one

RA8l)

swapping

per

structure

space

——

—

150080

storage
(six
RPO#4,
three RP2@ spindles,

The largest

TCP/IP

DECnet

support.

128
128
19

jobs
lines
LAT lines

timesharing

This monitor

monitor

supports:

without

—

——

—

——

AN-MONMAX. EXE

—

50 pseudo-terminals

—

40 NVTs
AMEG of memory

8
2

magnetic tape drives
line printers

card

reader

—

——

—

——

—

120 million words of
disk
storage
(six
RP@4,
three
RP@6,
one RP@7, three RP20 spindles,
two RA6@, or one RA8l) per structure
15000 pages for swapping space

In Steps 19 and 2@, you choose the
your needs and copy it to the file

» Step
l
|
I
l

19:

Connect to

Type CONNECT

PS:<SYSTEM>

TCP/IP monitor most appropriate
PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE.

and

press

the RETURN

the directory PS:<SYSTEM> by typing

SCONNECT PS:<SYSTEM>

for

key.

the CONNECT command.

<RET>

l’»Step 20A:

Type COPY montyp.EXE.* MONITR.EXE.* and

.’ Step 2¢B:

Type
COPY
PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>montyp.EXE.*
MONITR.EXE.*
press the RETURN key (update installation).

key

(new

installation).

press

the

RETURN
and

Use the COPY command for
either
a
new
installation
or
an
update
installation
to
copy
the monitor that you have selected to the file
MONITR.EXE.
"Montyp" designates the type of monitor you have selected
for
your system.
When the copy is successfully completed, the system
prints

The

OK message.

different

AN-MONMAX.EXE.

monitors

are

AN-MONBIG.EXE,

AN-MONDCN. EXE,

and

INSTALLING

TCP/IP-20

SCOPY montyp.EXE.* MONITR.EXE.*
montyp.EXE.1l

=> MONITR.EXE.1l

<RET>

INew

[Superseding]

installation

[OK]

C.6

CHANGING

Whenever a
INFORMATION

THE

SYSTEM

NAME

user
types
<CTRL/C>
before
1logging
in
or
gives
the
VERSION command, the system prints a message similar to:

TOPS-20

BIG

SYSTEM,

TOPS-2#

where n.n(nnnn) is the
version
system.
You
can
<change
the
entering the name you want into
the
name
contains
1lowercase
RAISE

before

entering

the

Monitor

n.n(nnnn)

and
edit
number
of
the
operating
system
name
"TOPS-20 BIG SYSTEM" by
the
file
PS:<SYSTEM>MONNAM.TXT.
If
1letters,
give the command TERMINAL NO

name.

The text of the system name can contain up
to
105
characters.
For
practical
purposes,
it
should
not exceed 32 characters to fit on a
single 72-character line of terminal output.
Steps 21 through 23 show
how
to change the system name to "TCP/IP Installation System" and how
to

change

Step

21:

the

new system

Type

name

TERMINAL NO

the

abbreviated

RAISE

and

press

the

name

RETURN

you

want lowercase letters in the system name,
Make sure that the CAPS LOCKED button on
depressed.
command.

"TCP/IP-Sys."

key

(optional).

type
the
TERMINAL
the terminal is not

STERMINAL NO RAISE <RET>
$
Step

22:

Change

Type

COPY

enter

the

system

TTY:

MONNAM.TXT

system

name

and

by entering

PS: <SYSTEM>MONNAM. TXT.

The

and

type

the

system

press

the

RETURN

key.

Then

<CTRL/Z>.

name

you

name

want
should

into

the

not

exceed

file
32

characters.

Use the COPY command to give the system a new system name.
After
vyou
enter
the
command,
the system waits for you to type the new name of
your system.
After you enter the new system name, type <CTRL/Z>.
In
the example, the new system name is TCP/IP Installation System.

SCOPY TTY:

MONNAM.TXT

TTY:

= MONNAM.TXT.1

TCP/IP

Installation

<RET>

System

“2Z

$
You can change
name only when

this file at any time,
the monitor is started

but the system reads the
system
(whenever you boot the system).

INSTALLING

B Step 23:

Type COPY TTY:

TCP/IP-28

TAPNAM.TXT and press the RETURN key.

the abbreviated system name and

type

You should also change the system name that will

volume

header

label

Enter

<CTRL/Z>.
be

written

the

of any tape initialized by users of the system.'

Do
this
by
entering
the
name
you
want
into
the
file
PS: <SYSTEM>TAPNAM,TXT.
This
system
name
must contain ten or fewer
characters, so you will probably have to abbreviate the name given
1in
the
previous
step.
The example shows how to change the system name
(that appears on tape labels written by the system) to "TCP/IP-Sys."

Give the system an abbreviated name with the COPY command.
After
you
enter
the
command,
the system waits for you to type the abbreviated
system name.
After
you
enter
the
abbreviated
system
<CTRL/Z>.
In the example, the abbreviated system name is

SCOPY TTY:

TTY:

name,
type
TCP/IP-Sys.

TAPNAM.TXT <RET>

TAPNAM, TXT.1

TCP/IP-Sys

“Z

C.7

COMPLETING YOUR TCP/IP INSTALLATION

Complete

Step

24:

your

installation by performing

Shut down

your

system

and

Steps

through

34.

bring it back up again.

Shutting down your system and bringing it back up again will
TOPS-2@
Version
6.1
and
TCP/IP-20
Version
4.0
software
INTERNET.ADDRESS

file

you

use
and

the
the

created.

As you bring up the system, the system output will
differ
from
that
shown
1in
Chapters
4
and 5 or Appendix A, Sections A.2.7 and A.2.8.
Your system output will contain messages about
the
1loading
of
host
names and different internet networks coming online.
If you are performing
a
new
installation,
Creating
the
Front-End
File
'system,
and
System, to complete the software installation
down and bring it back up again.

proceed
to
Chapter
5,
and to shut

Chapter
4,
Starting the
your
system

If you are performing an update installation, proceed to
Appendix
A,
Updating the DECSYSTEM-2¢ Software, Sections A.2.7 and A.2.8, Steps 48
through 63, to complete the software installation
and
to
shut
your
system down and bring it back up again.

Step

25:

Log

and

enable

your

capabilities.

PS:<SYSTEM> and press the RETURN key.

Follow the example to log in,
the appropriate directory.
TCP/IP
@QLOGIN

Installation

enable

System,

OPERATOR your—-password

your capabilities,

TOPS-2@ Monitor

type

and

CONNECT

connect

6.1(6763)

<RET>

Job 5 on TTY8 dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss,
<RET>
SCONNECT PS:<SYSTEM> <RET>
$
@ENABLE

Then

Last

INSTALLING

M) Step 26:

TCP/IP-28

Type TDIRECTORY HOSTS.TXT and press the RETURN key.

The file named
HOSTS.TXT
1is
in
your
SYSTEM: area.
(SYSTEM:
is
usually
defined
as
PS:<NEW-SYSTEM)>,PS:<SYSTEM>.)
As
an
ARPANET
customer,
you
will
have
access
to
a
new
copy
of
this
file
approximately
every two weeks, when it is updated by the ARPA Network
Information Center (NIC).
Use each new copy when you retrieve
it
to
be sure you are using the most recent copy.
Type

TDIRECTORY

HOSTS.TXT

obtain

information

about

the

file

HOSTS.TXT.

STDIRECTORY HOSTS.TXT <RET>
PS: <SYSTEM>

Write
HOSTS.TXT

27-MAR-85

18:11:54

$
When

your

HOSTS.TXT

system
file

has

with

access
the

the

following

ARPANET
command

networks,

obtain

new

sequence.

NOTE

You must

before

@ENABLE

have

you

can

your

TCP/IP

issue

the

monitor

following

wup

and

command

running

sequence.

<RET>

SIPHOST <RET>
IPHOST

TOPS-20AN TCP/IP

Interface
Inter face
Interface

@,
1,
2,

IPHOST>RETRIEVE

net
net
het

Host

Utility

Program

Version

6.1(42)

10.0.06.0 [ARPANET], adr 10.0.0.79 [DEC-TOPS28]
192.5.6.0 [DEC-MRRAD], adr 192.5.6.1
[DEC-TOPS20]
192.5.5.0 [DEC-MRNET], adr 192.5.5.4 [DEC-TOPS20]

HOST

SRI-NIC

101

HOSTS.TXT

<RET>

[ Opening TCP connection ]
[OK]
[Receiving TCP data ® ¢ & 0 2 0 5 9 & DO OO O OO OO B OB OO
[ Closing TCP connection ]
[OK]

IPHOST>EXIT

O N OO N E G SO0

eSS

]

[OK]

<RET>

$
The RETRIEVE
places
the

command gets the HOST table from SRI-NIC on port 161
and
table into the file HOSTS.TXT.
(Recognition input can be

this

help with

command.)

INSTALLING

mp Step 27:
The

Enter TYPE INTERNET.GATEWAYS and press the RETURN key.

INTERNET.GATEWAYS

which

TCP/IP-20

gateways

file

the

should

ARPANET

your

TOPS-20

SYSTEM:
host

can

area.
talk

It
to.

defines
DIGITAL

provides a file in
the
correct
INTERNET.GATEWAYS
format
with
the
TCP/IP
software.
This
file contains the gateway addresses for your
TOPS-20 host to communicate
with
the
ARPA
MILNET
gateways.
Your
TOPS-28%
host
will
be
able
to
talk
to
only
the MILNET gateways
specified by the NIC and the NOC for your site.
Contact your
ARPANET
liaison if you have questions.
Enter the
terminal.

TYPE

STYPE

command

display

INTERNET.GATEWAYS

;created

file

INTERNET.GATEWAYS

your

<RET>

by...

Created

25 JUN 1985
;GW/PRIME Internet

PRIME

the

16.0.0.94.,

1858-PST

192.5.2.6.

$
When your system has access
INTERNET.GATEWAYS file with

to the
ARPANET
networks,
obtain
the following command sequence.

new

NOTE

You must have
before you can

@ENABLE

your
issue

TCP/IP
monitor
up
and
running
the following command sequence.

<RET>

SIPHOST <RET>

IPHOST

- TOPS-2QAN TCP/IP Host

Interface
Interface
Interface

@,
1,
2,

net
net
het

Utility

Program

- Version

6.1(42)

19.0.9.9 [ARPANET], adr 10.0.0.79 [DEC-TOPS20]
192,5.6.0
[DEC-MRRAD], adr 192.5.6.1 [DEC-TOPS520]
192.5.5.8 [DEC-MRNET], adr 192.5.5.4 [DEC-TOPS20]

IPHOST>RETRIEVE GATEWAY SRI-NIC 101 INTERNET.GATEWAYS <RET>
[
[

Opening TCP connection
Receiving TCP data . ]

]
[OK]
[OK]

[

Closing

]

TCP connection

IPHOST>EXIT

[OK]

<RET>

$
The

RETRIEVE

and

places

the

table

can

help with

input

command

gets

the

into

GATEWAY

the

this

file

table

from

SRI-NIC

INTERNET.GATEWAYS.

command.)

port

141

(Recognition

INSTALLING TCP/IP-20

Step

28:

Determine

network-name
Each

address

has

which gateway

addresses to place

gateway-address,
the

in your

file.,

alternate-gateway-address

format

n.n.n.n

where n specifies a decimal
of the internet address.

octet

An
of

internet address consists of
32 bits).
For example, the

10.1.08.79.

(that

29:

You must

contain
editing
the

Step
Shut

Place

correct

8-bit

decimal

NOC,
place

addresses

into

or
in

number)

is, a
total
DEC-MARLBORO

vyour
ARPANET
your file.

1liaison,

INTERNET.GATEWAYS.

edit

the INTERNET.GATEWAYS file you receive from
DIGITAL
to
the
gateway
addresses
for
your
site.
Therefore, use an
program to place the correct addresses into the file and
save

customized

30¢:

the

four decimal octets (that
internet address for host

With the help of the ARPANET NIC and
determine which gateway addresses to

Step

is,

Shut

file

down

the

your

SYSTEM:

system

and

area.

then

read

Chapter 5 of

this

guide.

down your system in an orderly fashion and then read Chapter 5 of
this
guide
to reboot the system from disk.
By rebooting the system,
you load the HOSTS.TXT and INTERNET.GATEWAYS files.
Once you
reboot,
you can begin timesharing.

APPENDIX

GENERATING

This

appendix

(GALAXY)

this

TAILORED BATCH AND

describes

system

you must

system.

The

how

generate

specifically

have

already

standard

tailored

installed

GALAXY

TOPS-2@
for

system

SPOOLING

batch

your

standard

SYSTEM

and

spooling

installation.

Release

satisfactory

for

GALAXY

most

sites.

The procedures shown in Chapters 1 through 7
of
this
guide,
or
in
Appendix A or B, describe how to install Release 6.1 TOPS-2¢ software,
including a standard Release 5 GALAXY system.
After performing
those
procedures,
generate

you

can

GALAXY

use

system

the

steps

having

this

different

appendix

parameters

from

you
the

need

standard

onhe.

NOTE

While

the

GALAXY

steps

system

logged

in,

Release
(Steps

the

5
28

The

following

starting
l.

critical

phase

through

and
5@)

tailored

stopping

starting

should,

for

Release

4.2

Release

timesharing

the

your

standard
one

reasons,

The queues
Release
5

earlier)

users

tailored

safety

a
stand-alone system.
however, as long
as
a

GALAXY

need
(as

system

running.
summarize

the

procedure

for

generating

and

new GALAXY system.
the

DUMPER

disk.

special

batch

Run

wused

paragraphs

Run

with

system

performed
on
not be empty,
opposed
already

in generating
can

the

GALAXY

program

addition

control

restore

the

file

GALGEN

program

system

parameters.

the

source

called

GALAXY

code,

source

the

files

include

GALAXY.CTL.

create

The

name

file

containing

the

parameter

new

file

GALCNF.MAC.

Submit
batch
reads

the

control

file

GALAXY.CTL

your

currently
running
by GALAXY.CTL

system.
The
batch job that is created
the parameter file created by GALGEN
and

new

set

GALAXY

files

The

batch

job

creates

file

log

type

.EXE

that

should

generates

temporary

area.

saved

for

reference,
4.

Stop

all

system

Copy

the

components

(QUASAR,

LPTSPL,

all

the

o0ld

(usually

SY¥S:)

Copy

the

SYS:.

all

new

GALAXY

some
GALAXY

the

currently

running

GALAXY

etc.).

files

other
files

from

their

current

area

area.
from

the

temporary

area

GENERATING A

Start

Delete the .EXE files of the old GALAXY system when
the
new
batch
system
is
operating
correctly.
If
you want to be
cautious, you can save the o0ld .EXE files on
tape
or
1in
a
backup
directory
(see
Step
36 in this appendix).
You can
also delete the GALAXY source files (and the unrelated
files
restored
along
with
them
from
the
Distribution
tape).
However, 1f your installation can spare the disk space, it is
more
convenient
to leave the sources on disk.
Then, if any
code patches must be made to the batch system, you
have
the
sources
readily
available.
Otherwise, you have to restore
the sources from the software tape if patching is required.

the

TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM

components of

the

new GALAXY system.

NOTE

The procedures described below assume
Release
5
GALAXY
system
currently
procedures
can
be
carried
out
timesharing.

D.1

|
|
|

RESTORING

THE

GALAXY

SOURCE

that you have
a
running.
These
during
normal

FILES

To restore the GALAXY source files, you must build a directory,
mount
the
Distribution
tape,
and run the DUMPER program.
Perform Steps 1
through 22 to restore the GALAXY files.
NOTE

The
the

steps

console

this

appendix assume
(CTY).

that

you

are

using

terminal

l’»Step
I
|
I
|
|
I
|
|
|
|
|
|
I
|
|
I
|
|
|
|

You must be enabled and have
Follow the example to log in

Installation-test
QLOGIN

privileges
and enable

System,

TOPS-2f Monitor

OPERATOR your-password

Job 5 on TTY8
@QENABLE <RET>

to perform
these
your capabilities.

procedures.

6.1 (nnnn)

<RET>

dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss,

Last

NOTE

If you have tape
drive
allocation
enabled,
perform
Steps 2 through 6.
Otherwise, continue at Step 7.

NOTE

If you have already restored ALL of
the Distribution tape (as described
need not restore the GALAXY saveset
Step 16.

the
savesets
on
in Chapter 6), you
again.
Proceed to

GENERATING A TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM
Type OPR and press the RETURN key.

mp Step 2:
|
|
|

Type OPR to run the OPR program to set a tape drive unavailable.
SOPR <RET>

OPR>

Type SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE /ALL and press the RETURN key.

‘Ste]g 3:

To find out what drives on the system are available, type SHOW

STATUS

The system prints the status of all tape drives on
TAPE-DRIVE /ALL.
Use any tape drive that has the status of "UNLOADED."
the system.
OPR>SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE /ALL <RET>
OPR>

—--Tape Drive Status-USER
JOB#
REQ#
VOLID

15:00:09
STATE
DRIVE

Available
Unloaded

MTA@:
MTAl:

AVR:

MTA2:

Yes

Unloaded
AVR:

MTA3:

Yes

Unloaded
AVR:

MTAS:

Yes

Unloaded
AVR:

Yes

Unavailable

MTAG:
OPR>

.’.Steg 4:

Type SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAn:

UNAVAILABLE and press

the

RETURN

kez.

To allow the use of a tape drive without the intervention of the
The example
UNAVAILABLE.
type SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAn:
MOUNTR program,
as the tape drive, but you can specify any tape drive that
uses MTA@:
has

the

status

UNLOADED.

OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA@:

UNAVAILABLE

Enter text and terminate with 2

.’.Steg 5:

<RET>

Type USING GALGEN PROCEDURE and press <CTRL/Z>.

After the system prints "Enter text and terminate with ~“z,"
text

GALGEN

USING

PROCEDURE

and

then

prints the OPR prompt and several messages.

press <CTRL/Z>.

type

the

The system

Enter text and terminate with "2
USING GALGEN PROCEDURE "Z
OPR>

@:
@:

15:01:41

OPR>

SJ
sJ

PTYCON>

**%% OPR(6)

15:01:41
OPR>

15:01:41

****

-— Tape Drive Set Unavailable -MTA@: set unavailable for assignment by MOUNTR
-- Tape Drive Set Unavailable --

MTA@:

set unavailable

for assignment by MOUNTR

GENERATING A

I
I

Type

EXIT

TOPS-20

return

OPR>EXIT

mp Step 7:
To

Type

assign

and

TAILORED

press

command

the

BATCH AND SPOOLING

RETURN

level,

SYSTEM

key.

type

EXIT.

<RET>

ASSIGN MTA@:

tape

drive

SASSIGN MTA@:
$

and

your

press

job,

the

type

RETURN

key.

ASSIGN MTAQ:.

<RET>

NOTE

The examples in this guide
wuse
MTAQ:
as
the
tape
drive.
However, you can assign and use any tape drive
that has the status UNLOADED; MTA@:
1is not
required.
Be
sure
to use the name of the tape drive you assign
in Step 7 whenever MTA@: appears in this appendix.

’ Step 8:

Type

BUILD

PS:<BUILD>

and

press

the

RETURN

key.

Although you
can
Create a directory to hold the GALAXY source files.
give
it any name, a reasonable name for this directory is PS:<BUILD>,
because it is also known as the build area.
To
do
so,
type
BUILD
PS:<BUILD>.
The
system
displays either [New] if the directory does
not already exist or [01d]
if the directory
exists.
The
subcommand
prompt ($$) follows.

$SBUILD

PS:<BUILD>

<RET>

[New]

) Step 9:

Assign

storage

space.

copying
of
Assign sufficient storage space to the directory to allow
the
entire
fourth saveset (not just the GALAXY sources).
Fo llow the
example to assign storage space and to end the BUILD procedure.

SSWORKING 3008 <RET>
SSPERMANENT 3000 <RET>
$$<RET>
$
*Step

|
|
|

19:

Mount

the

Distribution

tape on MTA@:.

To restore the GALAXY files from tape, mount the Distribution tape
the
tape
drive
vyou assigned in Step 7.
(If you need help, refer
Chapter 2, Section 2.2, Step 9, of this guide.)
Be sure the d rive
on line.

» Step

11:

Type

You need to
from
tape.
DUMPER

DUMPER

and

press

the

RETURN

on
to

key.

run the DUMPER program to restore the GALAXY source
files
To run this program, type DUMPER.
The system pr ints the

prompt.

GENERATING A TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM
SDUMPER

<RET)>

DUMPER>

mpsStep 12:

and

Type TAPE MTAP:

the

press

RETURN

key.

ACCOUNT SYSTEM-DEFAULT and press the RETURN key.

Then

type

type TAPE
To tell the DUMPER program which tape drive you are using,
to use the
DUMPER
tell
to
LT
SYSTEM-DEFAU
ACCOUNT
type
Then
MTAQ:.
system-default

account.

DUMPER>TAPE MTA@:

<RET>

DUMPER>ACCOUNT SYSTEM-DEFAULT <RET>
DUMPER>

.’Step 13:

Type SKIP 3 and press the RETURN key.

To skip over the first three savesets on the Distribution tape, give
The DUMPER program prints a message identifying
the command SKIP 3.
each saveset it skips, and then gives the DUMPER prompt. Be prepared
for a 5 to 10 minute wait while DUMPER positions the tape.
<RET>

DUMPER>SKIP 3

DUMPER>

.’Step 14:

PS:<*>*.*,*

RESTORE

Type
RETURN

PS:<BUILD>*.*.*

and

press

the

key.

To restore all the files from the fourth saveset (including the GALAXY
The system prints a message
files), type the RESTORE command.
source
and pages restored,
files
of
number
the
and
saveset
the
identifying
followed

by the

DUMPER prompt.

* <RET>
% ,* PS:<BUILD>*.,.*
DUMPER>RESTORE PS:<*>*
Saveset ""GALAXY SOURCES FOR TOPS-20 V6.1""
Loading

End

Total
Total

files

into

PS:<BUILD>

Tape.

files
pages

restored:
restored:

n
n

DUMPER>

Error:

"GALAXY

SOURCES

FOR

TOPS-28

positioned at the correct saveset.

saveset

Give the REWIND

command

V6.1,"

to DUMPER and begin again at Step 13.

Error:

the

If DUMPER does not print a message identifying

the

tape is not

does not
PS:<BUILD>"
into
files
If the message "Loading
Be sure that
appear, no files are being restored from tape.
you have
drive
tape
the
on
the correct tape is mounted
Then exit from DUMPER and begin again
assigned to your job.
Contact
If errors persist, the tape may be bad.
at Step 8.
your DIGITAL Field Service Representative for assistance.

GENERATING

mpStep 15:
Once

TAILORED

BATCH AND

SPOOLING

SYSTEM

End the DUMPER program.

the

fourth

program.

from

DUMPER.

saveset

has

so,

The

system

DUMPER>REWIND

DUMPER>EXIT

been

restored

the

prints

from

tape,

rewind

example

the

TOPS-2¢

ENABLEd

end
the

the
tape

prompt

DUMPER
and

exit

($).

<RET>

.’Step 16:

Type

INFORMATION DISK-USAGE PS:<BUILD>

key.

and press the

RETURN

To
of

verify that you have restored all the files from the fourth saveset
the Distribution tape, type INFORMATION DISK-USAGE PS:<BUILD>.
The
system prints information about the amount of disk space used
by
the
directory.

SINFORMATION DISK-USAGE

PS:<BUILD>

<RET>

PS:<BUILD>

2597

Pages

assigned

3000 Working, 3000 Permanent pages allowed
34540 Pages free on PS:, 41460 pages used.

$
NOTE

|
|

If
you
restored
the
GALAXY
saveset
to
directory, use that directory name in Step 16.

mpStep 17:
If

another

STOP.

the

number

shown

correct

necessary

for

pages

assigned

Step

creating

tape mounted,

16,
a

GALAXY

then

does

you

not

may not

system.

begin

again

approximately

have

restored

Check

Step

11.

match

all

sure

the

you

the

files

have

the

NOTE

If you previously
restored
the
GALAXY
saveset
(as
described
1in
Chapter
6),
and
have the appropriate
number
of
pages
assighed,
proceed
to
Step
23,
Otherwise,
restore the GALAXY saveset again, starting

.’Efiep

18:

Step

Type

UNLOAD MTA@:

and press

To unload the tape from the tape
rewinds the tape onto the source

SUNLOAD MTA@:

can

mpStep 19:

now

remove

the

Once

you

unload

available

type

UNLOAD MTA@:.

The

system

reel,

Distribution

Type DEASSIGN MTA@:

pool

drive,

RETURN key.

<RET>

$
You

the

tape

from

resources.

tape

from

the

tape

drive.

and press the RETURN key.
the

drive,

so,

return

type

the

tape

DEASSIGN

drive

MTAQ:.

the

GENERATING A TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM
SDEASSIGN MTA@:

<RET>

$
NOTE

tape drive
a
If you performed Step 4, which removed
the system's usage, perform Steps 20 through 22.
from

|
|

Otherwise,

‘Step 2@:

continue at Step 23.

Type OPR and press the RETURN key.

Run the OPR program to set the tape drive available to users.

I
I
I

SOPR <RET>

OPR>

.’Step 21:

Type SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA@:

AVAILABLE and

the

press

RETURN

key.

To return the tape drive you removed from system usage in Step 4, type
SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA@:

AVAILABLE.

OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA@:
OPR>

PTYCON>

**** OPR(6)

]

@:
@:

15:13:53

OPR>

SJ
SJ

<RET>

-— Tape Drive Set Available -MTAQ: set available for assignment by MOUNTR

15:13:53

AVAILABLE

15:13:53

***%

——- Tape Drive Set Available -MTAQ: set available for assignment by MOUNTR

OPR>

mpStep 22:
l
I
I
I
l

this
To return to TOPS-20 command level and continue with
The system prints the ENABLEd prompt ($).
type EXIT.
OPR>EXIT

procedure,

<RET>

D.2

|
|

Type EXIT and press the RETURN key.

RUNNING THE GALGEN PROGRAM

Run the GALGEN program to create the GALAXY configuration
sure you run GALGEN Version 5, which is the latest version.
.}Step 23:

file.

Type GALGEN and press the RETURN key.

You must run the GALGEN program to

create

the

GALAXY

configuration

parameters
the
contain
will
which
PS:<BUILD>GALCNF.MAC,
file
GALGEN
Type
describing the tailored GALAXY system you are building.

The GALGEN program responds by giving its
and press the RETURN key.
paragraphs of
several
printing
then
and
number,
name and version
information.

GENERATING

TAILORED BATCH AND

SPOOLING

SYSTEM

SGALGEN <RET>

GALGEN

Version

[Starting
[Writing
In

the
text

5(3624)

GALAXY Generation Procedure for TOPS-20 System]
Configuration File PS:<BUILD>GALCNF.MAC.1]

GALAXY

following
of

dialog,

question

all

(list

questions
range

are

the

answers)

form:

[default

answer]

The line starts with the actual text of the question.
Following
the question is a description of the possible answers enclosed in
parentheses.
This description might be a
range
of
numbers,
a
list
of
keywords,
or
a
textual
description.
Following this
description is the default answer, enclosed in
square
brackets.
The default will be assumed if you only press the RETURN key.

You have the choice of carrying on a
LONG
dialog
1in
which
an
explanation
of
each
question
1is
provided automatically, or a
SHORT dialog in which it is assumed that you
are
familiar
with
the
GALAXY generation procedure.
1In either case, you can always

obtain the help text
any question.
Answer

the

following

dialog)
or
key implies

Dialog

mpStep 24:

SHORT
SHORT.

Length

typing

question

(for

short

(SHORT,LONG)

question mark

with

either

one).

(?)

LONG

Simply

response

(for

pressing

the

1long

RETURN

[SHORT]

STOP.

You have the option of a long dialog, in
which
GALGEN
explains
the
choices
it
offers
you,
or
a
short one, in which only the choices
themselves are displayed.
If you are an experienced user
of
GALGEN,
you
may
want
the short dialog, which is faster; in this case, press
the RETURN key and skip to Step 26.
Otherwise, continue at Step 25.

I)Step 25:

Type LONG and press the RETURN key.

To request the
key.
GALGEN
question about

Dialog

long

dialog with GALGEN, type LONG
responds
with
some
information
GALGEN parameters.

Length

(SHORT,LONG)

[SHORT]

Administrative

The
questions
in
parameters,
which
commands.

this
cannot

LONG

Controls

and

press

and

then

the

RETURN

first

<RET>

Parameters

section
determine
be
overridden
by

absolute
user
or

GALAXY
operator

GENERATING A TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM

The system logs all operator interactions in a disk file in the
Your answer to the following question specifies
spooling area.
the name to be used for this file.

Operator log filename (3-20@ Characters)
I’Step 26:

[OPERATOR-SYSTEM]

Answer the questions in the GALGEN display.

for you to
GALGEN presents a series of questions, one at a time,
of
explanation
an
25,
Step
in
dialog
long
a
for
asked
you
If
answer.
each question is included. Otherwise, you see only the questions, the
range of choices, and the default answer. The default answer is the
1is used
one that appears in brackets ([]). This value (the default)
if you answer the question by pressing the RETURN key.

Following is a sample of the dialog you would see if you typed LONG in
Press the RETURN key when you want the default answer shown
Step 25.
in brackets and are ready to see the next question in the GALGEN
Otherwise, type your answer and then press the RETURN key to
dialog.
see the next question.

for

In the sample dialog, the default answer is taken

except the last question in the dialog.

questions

all

NOTE

You must

supply

the

correct

your

for

values

own

system.

Operator log filename(3-2# Characters)

[OPERATOR-SYSTEM]

<RET>

Users can specify a priority for their batch and spooling
The allowable values on this
requests with the /PRIORITY switch.
and 63
lowest priority)
ing
parameter range between 1 (represent
The following two questions relate
(representing the highest).
to this switch. The first question requests the maximum priority
which may be specified by a non-privileged user.

Maximum priority

non-privileged

users

may

specify(1-63)

[20]

<RET>

You may specify the value to be used if the user does not specify
This value must be between 1 and the max imum
a /PRIORITY switch.
that you specified in the previous question.

Default for /PRIORITY on batch and spooling

requests(1-63)

[10]

<RET>

(printers, batch
This value is to control the number of objects
streams, etc.) that can be controlled by a single command in OPR.
This value should be at least the maximum number of objects of a
single type you may have.

The value must be at least 1.

Maximum number of objects that can be controlled with one command
(1-100)

[6]

<RET>

GENERATING

Specify

the

system.

equal

SPOOLING

batch

greater

SYSTEM

stream
than

zero

can

and

less

100040.

system

that

must

batch

stream

priority of a process
run in is determined

gets

number

value

Highest number
[100] <RET>

The
may

TAILORED BATCH AND

highest

The

process

much

gets

time

QUASAR

can

the

system

and the permissable range of queues
it
by the scheduler priority control word.

higher priority than all
necessary for execution.

run

process?(YES,NO)

[YES]

wish

ORION

wish

BATCON

run

system

process?(YES,NO)

[YES]

wish

LPTSPL

run

system

process?(YES,NO)

[YES]

system

jobs

wish

user

you

run

system

process? (YES,NO)

[YES]

<RET>

you

(1-10¢00)

<RET>
Do you
Do you

the

than

and

<RET>

Applications

The

following

section

supported

GALAXY

through

by
accessible

You

can

enable

establishes
(for

example,

OPR,

applications

the

parameters
NCP).

operator

through

you

Each

application must be associated
(for example, NCPTAB).

name

Application
<RET>

running

name

your

applications?(YES,NO)

carriage

answers

[YES]

<RET>

with

return

applications

applications
interface.

questions.

Will

for

These

the

following

application

exit(l1-280

you

the

are

running

the

application

table

DECnet-20,
refer
Manager's Guide and

and

Procedures

applications

appropriate
to

the

manual.

supported

documentation

names.
the

you

by
to

GALAXY,
determine

are

DEChet-20/PSI-2f

DECnet-20

Network

table

characters)

NOTE

refer

will

running
System

Generation

GENERATING

TAILORED

BATCH AND

Batch

The
for

Job

SPOOLING

SYSTEM

Defaults

questions in this section are used to define
default
values
the various options that a user can specify when submitting a

batch

job.

The batch user can specify a maximum
using
the /TIME switch.
1If he does
following default will be used:

Default

batch

job

runtime

runtime for
not specify

1imit(5-9999

seconds)

his
this

batch
switch,

[308]

<RET>

job
the

Every batch job has maximum
limits
for
each
type
of
spooled
output.
These
1limits
can
be
set
by
the
batch
user
with
appropriate switches to the SUBMIT command.
If the user
doesn't
specify these switches, the following defaults will be used:

Line printer output 1limit(@-9999 pages)
[208] <RET>
Card punch output 1limit(8-9999 cards)
[1000] <RET>
Paper tape punch output limit(6-5000 feet)
[208] <RET>
Plotter output limit(@#-5000 minutes)
[30] <RET>

The user can specify whether or not the batch log file should
be
printed
after
the job terminates by using the /OUTPUT switch to
the SUBMIT command.
The action is specified by:
LOG
to
always
print
the log file, NOLOG to never print the log file, and ERROR
to print the log file only if the job
ended
with
an
unhandled
error.,
If
the
wuser doesn't specify this switch, the following
value

will

Default

for

used.

batch

SUBMIT/OUTPUT

Line

The
the

questions in
line printer

Job
The

banner
user's

Number

Printer

(LOG,NOLOG,ERROR)

Defaults

this section
spooler.

are

and

used

pages

(8#-5)

[2]

<RET>

Parameters

set default

pages printed at the beginning of each
name and any /NOTE value is printed on

job banner

[LOG]

<RET>

values

print
thenm.

for

request.

GENERATING A TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM

Job trailer pages are printed at the end of each
print
request.
The user's name and any spooler checkpoint information is printed
on

them.

Number

job

trailer

pages(0-5)

[2]

<RET>

File header pages are printed before each
print
request.
The file name is printed
header

file or
copy
in
each
in BOLD letters on each

page.

Number of

file

header

pages(#-5)

[2]

<RET>

The user can specify a special form for a print request with
the
/FORMS
switch.
If
this switch is not specified, the following
default

Name

for

will

used.

standard

output

forms(4-6 Characters)

[NORMAL]

<RET>

The number
of
characters
that
uniquely
identify
a
form
Iis
compared
with
the
current
form
name
to determine if a forms
change is required for a specific user request.

Number of characters

which

uniquely

identifies

form(2-6)

[4]

<RET>

Tape

Label

Action

The system administrator can allow non-privileged
label processing.

users

Allow bypassing

[NO]

<RET>

for

non-privileged

Miscellaneous

The

questions

this

users?(YES,NO)

Defaults and

section

refer

Parameters

general

The following section establishes default bias
spooler unit conversion factors.

you want

the

standard

limit

bypass

GALAXY

parameters.

and

disk

page

computation(YES,NO)

[YES]

<RET>

GENERATING A TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM

specified
The default action to be taken when output exceeds the
output spooler may be to ABORT the job and ignore
an
for
limit
remaining output,

all

finish

processing

Default
ABORT

[End

ASK the operator what to do, or

the

PROCEED

job.

output-limit—-exceeded

action(ABORT,ASK,PROCEED)

[ASK]

<RET>

of Galgen

Dialog]

D.3

ASSEMBLING THE

NEW GALAXY SYSTEM

the
In the last step you completed the GALGEN program, which produced
GALAXY
parameter file, GALCNF.MAC.
This file contains your choice of
this
create
To
system.
spooling
options for a tailored batch and
batch
and
spooling
system
you must submit the GALAXY control file,
GALAXY.CTL reads GALCNF.MAC
GALAXY.CTL, to your present batch system.
and programs for a tailored GALAXY system.
files
the
generates
and
Perform

Step 27 to

‘Step 27:

Type
and

assemble

SUBMIT

press

the

the new GALAXY system.

PS:<BUILD>GALAXY.CTL/TIME:@:30:008/RESTARTABLE

RETURN key.

batch
the
to
file
.CTL
the
To start the assembly process, submit
the system prints a message giving the job
so,
doing
After
queue.
name, the request I.D., and the time limit of the batch job.
SSUBMIT PS:<BUILD>GALAXY.CTL.l/TIME:0:30:90/RESTARTABLE
[Batch job GALAXY queued, Request #1780, limit 0:30:00)
$

B6:

sJd

15:20:48

Batch-Stream @

-—— Started --

15:20:48

Batch-Stream 1

—-— Started --

Batch-Stream 2

—-— Started --

15:20:48

SJ
sSJ

@:
@:

OPR>

sJd

15:20:49

<RET>

Batch-Stream 0
~-- Begin -Job GALAXY Req #1700 for OPERATOR

While the GALAXY system assembly proceeds (this may take an hour),
system prints messages for each successful assembly it completes.
messages are similar
SJ

SJ
User

@:
@:

SJ
SJ

15:39:07

OPR>

@:
@:

the

following

PLEASE Req #6

PLEASE

OPR>

15:39:15

OPR>

15:39:16

example.

Batch-Stream 2 JOB #7 -- Message from Batch
Job

@:
s

the
The

FOR OPERATOR

PLEASE Assembly SuccessfulS$

Batch-Stream 2
Job PLEASE Req

Batch-Stream 2

Job CDRIVE Req

-- End -for OPERATOR

~- Begin -for

OPERATOR

GENERATING A

TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING

SYSTEM

NOTE

assembly is unsuccessful,
.LOG
file to see if you can

can,

correct

control

file),

specified .CTL
what
caused
programmer
Once

the

assembly

However,

before

the

files

.LOG

generation.

might

the

.LOG

the
appropriate
problem.
If you

the

involve
file,

and

If you are unable
failure,
consult

software

can

run

the

step,

that

conceivable

problems

that

arose

%-type

system.
Therefore, it is important
before you stop running the current

D.4

DOWN THE

GALAXY

have

checked
during
the

programs

and

OLD GALAXY

new
is

batch

system.

advisable

during

of
when

the new batch
problems now,

Once you
occurred

the

(warning)

Such
an
error
might
not
cause
processing
unsuccessful,
but could create problems later

SHUTTING

the

resubmit

specialist.
you

sure

editing

to
determine
your
systems

proceed

file.
the

find

completes,

you

(which
delete

examine

batch
error

check
system

occurred.

GALAXY.CTL
you attempt

to
to

that you correct
batch system.

be
use

any

SYSTEM

the

.LOG
files
to
be
sure
that
no
errors
build
procedure, you are ready to stop all old

start

the

new

ones.

Perform

Steps

through

so.
NOTE

During

the following steps, Steps 28 thorugh 53, it is
important
NOT
to have timesharing users logged in to
the system, as their
jobs
could
initiate
batch
or
spooling
requests
during
the
critical
period
of
changeover.
However, it is acceptable for requests to
be
present
in
the
queues at the time of Step 3¢ as
long as the old GALAXY system is a Release 5 system.

mp Step 28:
To

return

type

Type OPR and press the RETURN key.
to

the

OPR.

The

SOPR

<RET>

OPR program

system

prints

you can

the

OPR

stop the old

GALAXY

objects,

prompt.

OPR>

mp Step 29:
To

Type SHOW STATUS and press the RETURN key.

determine which GALAXY objects are in use,
give
The system responds with a list of GALAXY

command.,

OPR>SHOW

STATUS

<RET>

OPR>

16:32:03
Batch-Stream
Strm

—--

System

Status:
Status

Device

Status

the

SHOW

objects.

STATUS

GENERATING A TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM

Printer
Unit

Status:
Status

OPR>

»Step 3¢:

Type a SHUTDOWN command for each GALAXY object.

To be sure that each GALAXY object shuts down,
for

|
|
|

each

GALAXY object

shown

OPR>SHUTDOWN BATCH-STREAM

OPR>

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

16:32:37

Batch-Stream 0

--= Shutdown —--

16:32:37

Batch-Stream 1

-- Shutdown --

OPR>

type a SHUTDOWN command

Printer

29.

OPR>SHUTDOWN
OPR>

16:32:26

Step

PRINTER

16:32:26

<RET>

—-— Shutdown --

Printer #

@:2

-— Shutdown --

<RET>

16:32:37
Batch-Stream 2
-- Shutdown -d: OPR>
SJ
SJ
@: 16:32:37
Batch-Stream @
-- Shutdown -0:
sJ
SJ
@: 16:32:37
Batch-Stream 1
-=- Shutdown --

sSJ

OPR>

Error:

mpStep 31:

16:32:37

Batch-Stream 2

-—- Shutdown --

If you see a message similar
to
"--THERE
ARE
NO
DEVICES
STARTED--,"
vyou
can
ignore
this message and go on to the
next SHUTDOWN command.
The message
means
only
that
your
site was not using the specified device.

Type SHOW STATUS and press the RETURN key.

To verify that all parts of the GALAXY system are shut down, give
SHOW STATUS

the

command.

OPR>SHOW STATUS

<RET>

OPR>

-~ There are nho devices started --

16:32:47

OPR>

.Step 32:

Type EXIT and press the RETURN key.

return to

TOPS-2@¢

components, type EXIT.
OPR>EXIT

command

1level

you

can

stop

the

The system prints the ENABLEd prompt

GALAXY

($).

<RET>

.’Steg,33:

Type “ESPEAK and press the RETURN key.

To stop the GALAXY components you must enter the "ESPEAK command.
system prints [Please type SYSJOB commands - end with "Z].

D-15

The

GENERATING

$"ESPEAK
[Please

»Step 34:
You

TAILORED

<RET>
type SYSJOB commands -

stop

also

SYSJOB.

all

stop

the

KILL CDRIVE
KILL SPRINT

KILL LPTSPL <RET>

|
|

CCJOB 1 <RET>
STATUS <RET>

SYSTEM

"Z]

’Step

35:

Type

return

the

stop

commands -

runs

GALAXY

end

with

SYSJOB.RUN,

separate

job

You

under

components.

"2Z]
'

<RET>

<CTRL/Z>.
TOPS-2@

messages

"~z
SKILL

referenced

normally

KILL BATCON

several

SPOOLING

with

which

example

[Please type SYSJOB
KILL QUASAR <RET>
KILL ORION <RET>
KILL MOUNTR <RET>

AND

end

components

BATCON,

|
|
|
|
|
|

BATCH

Stop each GALAXY component.

should

and

command

then

level,

the

type

TOPS-2¢

<CTRL/Z>.

ENABLEd

The

prompt

system

prints

($).

QUASAR

KILL

ORION

KILL

MOUNTR

KILL

CDRIVE

KILL

SPRINT

KILL

LPTSPL

KILL

BATCON

CCJoOB

STATUS

SYSJOB

.’.Step

status

31-May-85

1639

INFO

DISMS

1013

31-May-85

MAPPER

DISMS

266

31-May-85

1639

5 MAILER

DISMS

1225

31-May-85

1639

LPTSPL

DISMS

415322

31-May-85

1639

@g:
l:

Job
Job

TTY
TTY

1603,
161,

36:

Type

1,
2,

BUILD

1639

PTYCON
EXEC

PS:<OLD-GALAXY>

and

press

the RETURN key.

You should create a directory to store your old GALAXY
system
before
copying your new one into SY¥S:.
To do so, type BUILD PS:<OLD-GALAXY>.
The system prints [New] and the subcommand prompt ($$).

SBUILD PS:<OLD-GALAXY>
[New]

<RET>

’Step 37:
To create
key.
You

Press the RETURN key.
a directory with default characteristics,
return to TOPS-20 command level.

press

the

RETURN

GENERATING A TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM

[New]

SS<RET>

press

the

To copy your old QUASAR program into the back-up directory that
The system prints an
type the COPY command.
just created,

you
[OK]

mpStep 38:

Type COPY
RETURN

message when

key.

SYS:QUASAR.EXE

and

PS:<OLD-GALAXY>*

the copy completes.

SCOPY SYS:QUASAR.EXE PS:<OLD-GALAXY>* <RET>

PS: <SUBSYS>QUASAR.EXE.1 => PS:<OLD-GALAXY>QUASAR.EXE.l

[OK]

.’.Step 39:

the

Copy

other

files

your

GALAXY

system

into

PS: <OLD-GALAXY>.

files of
the
Repeat Step 38 as many times as necessary to copy all
You must copy all of
your present GALAXY system into PS:<OLD-GALAXY>.

the

following

files,

if they exist:

BATCON.EXE

CDRIVE. EXE

GLXLIB.EXE
LPTSPL.
EXE
MOUNTR. EXE
OPR.EXE
ORION.EXE
PLEASE. EXE
QUASAR.EXE

SPRINT.EXE

SPROUT.EXE

D.5

STARTING UP THE NEW GALAXY SYSTEM

with

Now you are ready to replace the old GALAXY system on SYS:
new tailored system

(Steps 40 through 48).

your

NOTE

If you restored the GALAXY source files to a directory
that directory name in
use
PS:<BUILD>,
than
other

|
|

Steps

.’Emep 4¢:

Type

490

press

and

COPY

41.

PS:<BUILD>QUASAR.EXE

the RETURN key.

To copy the QUASAR.EXE component of the new

system area, type the COPY command.
when

the

PS:<SUBSYS>QUASAR.EXE

and

into

the

GALAXY

system

The system prints an

[OK] message

copy completes.

$SCOPY PS:<BUILD>QUASAR.EXE PS:<SUBSYS>QUASAR.EXE <RET>
$

PS: <GALAXY>QUASAR.EXE.1l => PS:<SUBSYS>QUASAR.EXE.1l

[OK]

GENERATING

.’.Step

41:

42:

start

The

Type
the

system

"ESPEAK

and press

new GALAXY

system

prints

[Please

mpStep 43:
To

must

[Please

type

SPOOLING

the

GALAXY

is necessary
PS:<SUBSYS>.

the

RETURN

you must

type

SYSJOB

SYSTEM

system

into

the

SYSJOB

commands

to copy all the
files
You must copy all the

key.

enter

commands

end

with

the
-

end

“ESPEAK
with

command.

"Z].

"Z]

Start each component in the new GALAXY system.

sure

that

type

the

all

RUN

the

command

example

[Please type SYSJOB
RUN SYS:QUASAR <RET>

RUN

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

RUN SYS:MOUNTR
RUN SYS:CDRIVE
RUN SYS:SPRINT
RUN SYS:LPTSPL
JOB 1 / <RET>
RUN SYS:BATCON
/ <RET>
STATUS <RET)>

*Step

44:

SYS:ORION

Type

return

components
for

start

|
]

AND

area.

$ "ESPEAK <RET>

BATCH

Repeat Step 40 as many times as it
of
your
new
GALAXY
system into
files listed in Step 39.

’Step

|
I

TAILORED

Copy the other components of
system

|
|
|

each

the

GALAXY

commands

the

component

GALAXY

system

referenced

start,

vyou

SYSJOB.RUN,

components.

end

with

~2Z]

<RET>

<CTRL/Z)>.

TOPS-2@

command

level,

type

<CTRL/Z>.

~Z
SRUN SYS:QUASAR
RUN

SYS:ORION

RUN

SYS:MOUNTR

RUN

SYS:CDRIVE

RUN

SYS:SPRINT

RUN

SYS:LPTSPL

JOB

RUN

SYS:BATCON

STATUS
SYSJOB

31-May-85

1653

g
1

INFO
MAPPER

status

DISMS
DISMS

at
at

415322
415322

31-May-85

1653

31-May-85

1653

5
7

MAILER
LPTSPL

DISMS
DISMS

at
at

415322
415322

31-May-85
31-May-85

1653
1653

$
‘Step

45:

Type

OPR

and

press

You

must

return

OPR

command

new

GALAXY

system.

the

RETURN

level

key.
start

the

components

vyour

GENERATING

SOPR

TAILORED

BATCH AND

SPOOLING

SYSTEM

<RET>

OPR>

l’EWep 46:
To

start

Type TAKE SYSTEM:SYSTEM.CMD and press the RETURN key.
all

the

components

the

new

GALAXY

system,

type

TAKE

SYSTEM:SYSTEM.CMD.

OPR>

16:54:37

Batch-Stream

:
;
:
:
I
:
{
[

16:54:37
16:54:37
16:54:37
16:54:37
16:54:37
16:54:37
16:54:37

OPR>

Batch-Stream 1
-— Set Accepted -Batch-Stream 2
-- Set Accepted -Batch-Stream 0
-—- Startup Scheduled -Batch-Stream 1
-— Startup Scheduled -Batch-Stream 2
-— Startup Scheduled -Printer 0
-- Set Accepted -Printer @
~-- Startup Scheduled --

‘Step

47:

SHOW STATUS

OPR>TAKE

verify

properly,

SYSTEM:SYSTEM.CMD

Type
that

each

-— Set Accepted

and

press

component

you

should

now

OPR>SHOW

STATUS

<RET>

type

<RET>»

of
SHOW

the

RETURN

your

-—-

Batch~-Stream
Strm

Device

Idle
1Idle

1Idle

Printer
Unit

Status

Status:

Status:
Status
Idle

OPR>

mp Step 48:
I
|
I
|
®

end

the

Type EXIT and press the RETURN key.
OPR

program,

OPR>EXIT <RET>
$

type

EXIT.

system

command.

Status

@
1

System

key.

GALAXY

STATUS

OPR>

16:54:57

running

GENERATING A

D.6

MAKING

Once

your

YOUR

NEW

new system

TAILORED

GALAXY

BATCH AND SPOOLING

SYSTEM

PERMANENT

successfully running, you may want
to
delete
PS:<GALAXY>, and PS:<OLD-GALAXY> to

all
the
files
from
PS:<BUILD>,
make more disk space available.

.’Efifip 49:

Type

DELETE

RETURN

PS:<BUILD>*.*,PS5:<OLD-GALAXY>*.*

|
|

Type the DELETE command to remove the o0ld
order
to make more disk space available.

for

each

file

SDELETE

and

press

the

key.

GALAXY files
from
disk
The system prints a message

it deletes.
PS:<BUILD>*.*,PS:<OLD-GALAXY>*
.,* <RET>

NOTE

|
|
|

If your GALAXY files are in
a
directory
other
than
PS:<BUILD>,
use
that
directory
name
in
place
of
PS:<BUILD> in Step 49.

‘Step

I
I
|
|

50:

return

Type
to

OPR level

$OPR <RET>
OPR>

OPR and press
to

the

RETURN key.

supervise

your

new

GALAXY system,

type

OPR.

INDEX

Abbreviations for system
5-4
Account validation, 3-12

reload,

Accounting shift changes,
ARPANET, See TCP/IP
Audience, vii

3-17

Beware file, 1-1, 2-2,
Bias controls, 3-14
Bootstrap file, 4-8

4-9,

on the public structure, 2-28
parameter setting of, 3-12
Disk drives, 1-1 to 1-2
MSCP-served, 3-18
structure sizes, 3-2
Disk packs

A-2

how to label, 2-2
how to mount, 2-3 to 2-4
Distribution tape, 1-5, D-4

for TCP/IP installation,
installing, 6-1 to 6-6

3-15

Command

processor
loading, 2-20¢
starting, 2-21
See

C-1

savesets for, 6-1
DLUSER program, 2-22, A-6
DMO program, 4-1, 4-11
DUMP.EXE, 2-29
DUMPER program, 2-23, 6-3,

A-20

Class scheduling, 3-14 to
Command files
SYSJOB.RUN, D-16, D-18

Computer

UETP,

7-6

CHECKD program, 5-4, A-3, A-18
CI2@ (Computer Interconnect),
2-19, 5-2, 5-4, A-11, A-17,
A-18,

Directories (Cont.)
deleting the temporary

c-2,

D-4

2-12,

DX20 microcode,

A-7,

5-2,

4-12,

A-19

Interconnect

also

CI20 (Computer
Interconnect)

6-1-CONFIG.CMD

See Configuration command
Configuration command file,
for new installation, 3-4

A-19

file
3-21
to

See

(Ethernet)

NIA20

also

3-20

for

update
to

installation,

File

A-12

Console terminal output
at system startup, 5-5,

A-18

archiving,

TCP/IP,

C~5,

C-10

INTERNET.ADDRESS,

INTERNET.GATEWAYS,
DDMP

savings

program,

C-=5

front-end

5-4,

control

2865,

A-18

panel,

key,

Front

2-8

end

2-1

A-13

copying files for, 4-3 to 4-11
creating the file system for,

4-8,

4-1

halting

<BUILD>, D-4
for GALAXY sources,

6-5
for language sources, 6-5
for TCP/IP, C-2
<REMARKS>, 3-23
system, 2-21 to 2-22, A-6

4-10

a file system
structure for, 3-25 to 3-26
configuration file for, 2-11,

2-9

3-22,

4-3

building

2-9

Directories
changing <OPERATOR>,
creating

floppy disks,

copying files from, 4-3 to 4-11
for installation, 1-4, A-1
for TCP/IP installation, C-1
how to mount, 2-4

3-18

powering up, 2-2
preparing for ‘installation,
DELETE

2-18

4-11

list of front-end,
migration of, 3-16
Floppy disks

C-11

time,

2-19,

DECSYSTEM--20

Model

3-15

from

copying

for

to C-11
HOSTS.TXT,

Daylight

2-13

Files

Conventions,

files

a front—-end structure
3-25 to 3-26

initializing,

A-19

Data

system

building
for,

A-13

A-15

4-13

the monitor

for,

4-1

4-2

list of files for, 4-190
programs for, 4-1
restarting the monitor for,
to

A-7

Index-1

saving

4-3

the monitor

for,

4-8

4-2

Magnetic

GALAXY

assembling

the

new,

D-13

D-14

configuration file, D-7
how to tailor, D-1 to D-20¢
summary of, D-1 to D-2
making the new system permanent,
D-20

the

GALCNF.MAC,

new,

D-17

program,

D-7

Gateway

address

for

TCP/IP,

how

D-7

mount,

2-4

C-1
A-2

2-6

unit numbers,

3-8

2-29

A-19

Monitor

D-20

changing the system name for,
3-3 to 3-4, C~-8 to C-9
for TCP/IP, C-6 to C-7
for TOPS-20 Version 6.1, 1“5,

C-12

3-1 to
front-end
halting,

D-13

3-2

4-1 to 4-2
restarting, 4-2 to 4-3
saving, 4-8
loading and starting, 2-6

C-10

obtain,

(Cont.)

installation,
installation,

3-9
MAKDMP program,

D-7

GALGEN

HOSTS.TXT,

how

logical

D-17

starting

TCP/IP
update

MCB,

restoring files for, D=2 to
running GALGEN, D-7 to D-13
shutting down the old, D-14

tapes

for
for

C-10

2-13
INI program,
Installation

4-1'

renaming

4-4

for a new system, 2-1
See also New installation
for TCP/IP, C-1
See also TCP/IP
for updating TOPS-2¢, A-l
See also Update installation
Installation tape, 1-4
Installation tools
floppy disks, 1-4
for new installation, 1-4
for TCP/IP installation, C-1
for update installation, A-1l to

TCp/1IP,

C-1

update,

A-~-1

MOU

1-5

INTERNET.ADDRESS,

obtain,

C-5

INTERNET.GATEWAYS,

(Local

Area

C-11

Transport),

Network information,
New installation

creating
to

types,

the

3-9

LPFORM,.INI,

3-23

unit
3-8

3-24

Magnetic tape drives, 1-3
allocating, 3-16 to 3-17
Magnetic tapes
for new installation, 1-4

file

3-19

system,

2-1

2-29

creating

the

front-end
4-1

file

4-13

also

Ethernet

3-20

Latency optimization, 3-12
Line printers, 1-3
initialization file, 3-23 to
3-24
parameters, 3-9 to 3-11
random access memory (RAM) file,
3-10

vertical formatting
file, 3-10
Logical names, 3-7 to

B-1

program,

See
LAT

for,

2-21

installing the Distribution
tape, 6-1 to 6-6
running the UETP program, 7-1
to 7-7
starting the Version 6.1 system,
5-1 to 5-5
tailoring the system, 3-1 to
3-26
NIA2¢ (Ethernet), A-11, A-20

tapes

Installation, 1-4
Interfaces for TCP/IP,

2-18

new, 2-6
pocket guide

system,

Distribution,

A-10

to
installation

Monitor

A-2

how

of,

restarting,

(VFU)

Operator's

directory,

3-22,

A-1l3

Per formance improvements, 3-12
3-13
latency optimization, 3-12
working set swapping, 3-13
PIP program, 4-1, 4-6,
5-1-PTYCON.ATO, A-13
6-1-PTYCON.ATO, A-13
QT@23,

l—l r

QT@94,

Cc-1

Recognition
RED

program,

References,

Index-2

C-1

input,
4-1,

viii

viii
4-7

TCP/IP

Reloading the system
abbreviations for,
Remote lines, 3-19
Restoring

software,

bundled,

2-23

(Cont.)
changing the

5-4

2-23

2-27,

A-7

6-4 to
files, 6-4
2-26, A-9

sources,

Installation
A-8

source
system
system
TCP/IP
to

6-5,

choosing a monitor, C-6 to C-8
completing installation, C-9 to

6-6

customizing

data

C-5

tape,

2-23

monitor installation, C-2
restoring bundled software, C-2
restoring TCP/IP Distribution

4-12,

3-15

3-14

monitor,

tape, C~-2 to C-4
softare package, C-1
supported interfaces, C-5
Terminal lines, 1-2 to 1-3
dial-up, 3-6 to 3-7

Time zone, setting, 3-11
Tools for installation,

4-1

4-2

to 2-27,
A-14,

6-4

unbundled,

QTP99,

1-5,

2—1 ’

TOPS-2@ Version 5.1
reverting to, A-20

A-27

to A-21
shutting down, A-14 to A-15
TOPS~20 Version 6.1
as permanent monitor, A-23 to

package,
1-1, C-1

A-27

C-1

primary monitor,

A-22

A-23

monitors

for,

1-5,

3-1

3-2,

A-1l5

A-11

A-19

SYSJOB.RUN, D-16, D-18
System message levels,

starting,

output

for,

5-5,

Protocol/Internet

2-6

Tapes

for new installation, 1-4
for TCP/IP installation, C-1
for update installation, A-2
how to mount, 2-4 to 2-6
logical unit numbers, 3-8 to
3-9

UETP

4-9,

A-2

Protocol

TCP/IP

program

running, 7-1 to 7-7
optional tests, 7-4 to 7-6
standard tests, 7-1 to 7-4
UFD program, 4-1, 4-5
Update installation, A-1 to A-27
creating 6~1-CONFIG.CMD, A-12
to

A-13

creating

TCP/IP

up the monitor,

TOPS20.BWR, 1-1, 2-2,
Transmission Control
See

Tape drives, 1-3
allocating, 3-16 to 3-17
mounting tapes on, 2-4 to

5-1

A-19

3-19

startup

console terminal
5-5, A-18

bringing

6-4, 6-6
package,

C-1

Structure size, 3-2
Summary of manual, vii to viii
SYSJOB program, 2-19, 5-4, A-18,

System

C-1

Tools tape, 6-1,
TOPS-20 software

D-6

Software installation
See Installation
Software
QT@g23,

A-2

TCpP/1P,

bundled,

restoring, 2-23
6-6, A-7 to

numbers for, 3-6
speeds for, 3-5 to 3-6
Terminal servers, 3-20

3-15

front-end

C-1

C~-12

Software

C-10

C~4

SETNOD, A-19
Shutdown
to

gateway address, C-12
installation tools, C-1
installing software for,

3-14

the

C-5

C-12

6-5

SAV program, 4-1, 4-7
Scheduler controls, 3-13

file,

files, 6-5
files, 2-24, A-8
program files, 2-25, A-8
Distribution tape, C-3

A-19

class,

data

INTERNET.ADDRESS, C-5 to C-6
INTERNET.GATEWAYS, C-11 to

2-27,

A-9

sources,

files,

HOSTS.TXT,

D=5

UETP files, 2-26, A-9
RP2@ controller, 2-12, 4-11,

bias,

C-8

c-12

tape,

documentation
GALAXY files,

language

name,

2-27
to

A-10

Distribution

GALAXY

system

C-9

A-6

C-9

Index-3

system
to

A-7

directories,

Update installation (Cont.)
making Version 6.1 the
permanent monitor, A-23

Update installation (Cont.)
reverting to Version 5.1,
to

setting parameters for
<OPERATOR>, A-13
shutting down Version 5.1,

A-27

making Version 6.1 the primary
monitor, A-22 to A-23
preparing for, A-2 to A-6
renaming the monitor, A-10 to

restoring
to

Version

6.1,

A-15

A-19

bundled

software,

A-7

tools

for,

A-1

A-2

A-19

Working

Index-4

A-14

A-15

starting

A-12

A-20

A-21

set

swapping,

3-13

TOPS-20
KL Model B Installation Guide

AA-M229B-TM

READER’S COMMENTS
NOTE:

This form is for document comments only. DIGITAL will use comments submitted on
this form at the company’s discretion. If you require a written reply and are eligible to
receive one under Software Performance Report (SPR) service, submit your comments on an SPR form.

Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well-organized? Please make suggestions for improvement.

Did you find errors in this manual? If so, specify the error and the page number.

Please indicate the type of reader that you most nearly represent.
[ ] Assembly language programmer
[ ] Higher-level language programmer

[0 Occasional programmer (experienced)
[1 User with little programming experience
] Student programmer

] Other (please specify)

Name

Date

Organization

Telephone

Street
City

State __________ Zip Code
or Country

No Postage

Necessary

if Mailed in the
United States

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 33 MAYNARD MASS.

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

200 FOREST STREET

MRO1-2/L12

MARLBOROUGH, MA

01752

Cut Along Dotted Line

SOFTWARE PUBLICATIONS